SP-10 IFU 1810 en

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 308

Automated Hematology Slide Preparation Unit

SP-10
Instructions for Use

CHAPTER 1 Introduction
CHAPTER 2 Safety Information
CHAPTER 3 Part Names and Functions
CHAPTER 4 Reagents
CHAPTER 5 Sample Registration
CHAPTER 6 Smear Preparation
CHAPTER 7 Smear List
CHAPTER 8 Device Settings
CHAPTER 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts
CHAPTER 10 Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 11 Technical Information
CHAPTER 12 Installation
CHAPTER 13 Appendix
CHAPTER 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection
CHAPTER 15 Liu Stain
CHAPTER 16 Warranty
Index

KOBE, JAPAN

Date of Last Revision: October 2018


© SYSMEX CORPORATION 2010-2018 Software Version: 00-14 onwards
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1


1.1 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 Overview of the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 About the manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.5 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Chapter 2 Safety Information 2-1


2.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Avoiding infections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.4 Handling of reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.6 Disposal of waste fluid, waste materials, and the device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.7 Labels on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.8 Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.9 HOST connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions 3-1


3.1 Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Pneumatic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3 Sampler (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.4 Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5 Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6 Numeric keypad dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.7 Status display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.8 List of menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Chapter 4 Reagents 4-1


4.1 Storage and shelf life of reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Symbols used on the labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Chapter 5 Sample Registration 5-1


5.1 Terms used in slide preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Register slide screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3 Registering a new sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.4 Host computer inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Deleting smear information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

I
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Smear Preparation 6-1


6.1 Startup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Preparing smears with stand alone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3 Manual smear preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.5 Timer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Chapter 7 Smear List 7-1


7.1 Smear list screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Selecting the displayed information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.5 Deleting smear information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Chapter 8 Device Settings 8-1


8.1 Entering the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Configuring system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3 Device settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.4 Smear and stain settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.5 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.6 Setting sampler stop conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8.7 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.8 Default settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device


and replacing supply parts 9-1
9.1 Daily maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Weekly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.3 Monthly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.4 As-needed maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.5 Reagent registration function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.6 Replacing supply parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.7 Viewing histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
9.8 SP-10 maintenance inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 10-1


10.1 Error dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Error list screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Action messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4 Viewing the error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.5 Error message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.6 Cause of errors and remedial actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.7 Test operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
10.8 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

II
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Table of Contents

Chapter 11 Technical Information 11-1


11.1 Performance/specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Interface protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3 Checking the program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.4 GNU General Public License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Chapter 12 Installation 12-1


12.1 Unpacking checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.5 Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.6 Removing the shipping fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.7 Connecting the pneumatic and reagent tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.8 Connecting the connection cords and power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.9 Turn power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.10 Obtaining an IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Chapter 13 Appendix 13-1


13.1 ID barcode specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 Print format of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.3 Recovery process for stain tank errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.4 Sample IDs with 16 or more digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection 14-1


14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Slide registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.3 Smear preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.4 Smear list screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.5 Instrument settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Chapter 15 Liu Stain 15-1


15.1 Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.2 Making a smear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.3 Weekly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15.4 Connecting the pneumatic and reagent tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

Chapter 16 Warranty 16-1

Index

III
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Table of Contents

IV
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the SP-10 Automated Hematology Slide Preparation Unit.
Please read and understand the contents of this manual to ensure proper use of the device and store in a
location where it is readily accessible.
The SP-10 is a fully automated slide preparation and staining unit. Routine operations include slide
preparation and staining, in a FIFO (First in, first out), operation.
By means of ID scanning, mixing, and the wedge method, the SP-10 can make a smear from a sample that
has been judged abnormal as a result of analysis using a hematology analyzer connected to a sample
conveyor systems such as the XN-3000 and XN-9000.
In order to make smears that are uniform and suitable for microscopy, staining solution is dispensed to each
smeared slide one at a time.
The SP-10 receives the necessary information from the host computer or the conveyor system and makes
smears based on the smearing conditions set on the SP-10 main unit.

Contact Addresses

1-5-1 Wakinohama-Kaigandori, Chuo-ku, Kobe 651-0073, Japan

Authorized Representatives

Europe, Middle East and Africa

Bornbarch 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany


Phone: +49 40 5 27 26-0 / Fax: +49 40 5 27 26-100

Americas

577 Aptakisic Road, Lincolnshire, IL 60069, U.S.A.


Phone: +1-224-543-9500 / Fax: +1-224-543-9505

Asia-Pacific

9 Tampines Grande #06-18 Singapore 528735


Phone: +65-6221-3629 / Fax: +65-6221-3687

1-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 1 Introduction

Ordering Supplies and Replacement Parts


If you need to order supplies or replacement parts, please consult with your local dealer or Sysmex representative.

Service and Maintenance


Please contact the Service Department of your local Sysmex representative.

Training Courses
Please contact the Service Department of your local Sysmex representative for details.

Additional Components
• Sampler
Automatically supplies samples to the main unit.
• Hand-held barcode reader
When smears are made manually, the hand-held barcode reader scans the bar-coded sample ID number for
automatic entry in the device.
• Waste level monitoring sensor
The waste lever monitoring sensor notifies the operator when the waste container is full.
• Automated hematology analyzer XN series transportation units
For details, see the following.
(➤XN series (For XN-9000 system) Instructions for Use, "Chapter 4: 4.4 Transportation units")

The system described in this manual is marked with a CE-mark which confirms
the compliance with the essential requirements of the following European
Directives:
98/79/EC on in vitro diagnostic medical devices
2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical and electronic equipment

The system described in this manual is compliant with the European ln-Vitro
Diagnostic (lVD) Directive and additionally marked with an EAC-mark which
confirms the compliance with applicable Technical Regulations of Eurasian
Economic Union.

1-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Intended use


The SP-10 is designed for the purpose of making smears from EDTA blood samples. The device is not intended for
any other use.
The intended use also include performing the cleaning and maintenance procedures at the specified intervals.

1.2 Overview of the instrument


This instrument automatically creates and stains smears. The instrument automatically identifies sample tubes,
mixes samples in EDTA sample tubes, aspirates and stains the samples, and creates smears.
The instrument can be used on a standalone basis or as part of XN-3000 and XN-9000.

External view of External view of XN-9000


SP-10 (stand alone) External view of XN-3000 (basic configuration)

* IPU, transportation controller, and pneumatic unit are omitted in this figure.

Note:
If you are using the XN-3000 or XN-9000, see the manuals for the XN-3000 or XN-9000.

1-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.3 About the manuals

1.3.1 Structure of this manual


This manual consists of the following chapters.

Chapter Description

Chapter 1: Introduction Explains an overview of this manual and of the device.

Chapter 2: Safety Information Explains precautions to be observed for safe use of the device,
and also explains the meaning of the safety symbols that
appear on the device.

Chapter 3: Part Names and Functions Explains external views, names and functions of each of the
devices connected to the device.

Chapter 4: Reagents Explains the reagents to be used in the device.

Chapter 5: Sample Registration Explains the procedures for registering samples and conditions
for smear preparation.

Chapter 6: Smear Preparation Explains how to prepare smears.

Chapter 7: Smear List Explains the smear list.

Chapter 8: Device Settings Explains the device settings.

Chapter 9: Performing maintenance of Explains an overview of the maintenance tasks for the device
device and replacing and explains how to perform those tasks, including the
supply parts replacement of reagents and supply parts.

Chapter 10: Troubleshooting Explains the errors that may occur in the device and how to
troubleshoot them.

Chapter 11: Technical Information Explains technical information such as specifications.

Chapter 12: Installation Explains an unpacking checklist and explains how to install the
device.

Chapter 13: Appendix Explains the specifications of the ID barcode label and the
error recovery processing.

Chapter 14: DIA (DI-60) Connection Explains settings and functions when the DIA (DI-60) is
connected.

Chapter 15: Liu Stain Explains the Liu stain.

Chapter 16: Warranty Explains the warranty of the device.

1-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.3.2 Points to note about this manual


• Unauthorized reproduction of part or all of this manual is prohibited.
• Images and certain details related to product are for illustration purposes only and may not exactly match with
what is indicated within this manuals.

1.4 Symbols used in this manual


Warnings, Cautions, Information, and Notes provide important safety and operational information.
Failure to comply with this information may compromise safety. Be sure to follow all indicated instructions.

Risk of infection
Failure to observe this warning may result in infection by pathogens.

Warning!
High risk. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury to the operator.

Caution, Hot!
This symbol indicates the possibility of injuries such as burns if the indication is ignored and the
instrument is mishandled.

Caution!
Medium risk. Failure to observe this warning may result in property damage. Intended to prevent
damage and incorrect measurement results.

Caution!
Indicates a potential risk of physical damage to some of the functions of the device caused by
static electricity discharge from the human body, as a result of incorrect operation or failure to
observe this caution.

Information
Low risk. Rules which should be observed when operating this device.

1-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 1 Introduction

Note:
Background information and practical tips.

1.5 Trademarks
• Sysmex is a registered trademark of SYSMEX CORPORATION, Japan.
• CELLPACK and CELLCLEAN are registered trademarks of SYSMEX CORPORATION.
• Linux is a registered trademark or trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• SARSTEDT, S-MONOVETTE and MICROVETTE are registered trademarks of Walter Sarstedt Geräte und
Verbrauchsmaterial für Medizin und Wissenschaft.

Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. The fact that a trademark is not explicitly indicated in this manual does not authorize its use.
TM and ® are not explicitly indicated in this manual.

1-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.1 General information

Warning!
• This device must only be used as described in this manual.
• Your local Sysmex representative will unpack and install the device, and check initial
operation.
• Keep hair, fingers, and clothing away from moving parts while the device is in operation.
• Should the device emit unusual odors or smoke, turn off the power immediately and unplug
the power cable. Contact your local Sysmex representative. Continuing to use the device may
result in fire, electrical shock, or injury.
• Do not spill blood samples or reagents on the device. Do not insert or drop staples, clips, or
other metal objects into the device. This may cause short-circuiting and smoke. Should an
abnormal condition occur, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cable. Contact
your local Sysmex representative.
• The operator should never touch the electrical circuitry inside the cover. Danger of electrical
shock, especially if the hand is wet.
• The device must never be connected to a power outlet of the wrong voltage. The device must
always be grounded. Otherwise fire or electrical shock may result.
• Do not damage the power cable. Do not place any heavy objects on the power cable or forcibly
pull on the power cable. Risk of fire and electrical shock due to short-circuiting or wire
breakage.
• Switch off the power before connecting any peripheral devices (such as a host computer).
Otherwise electrical shock and failure may result.

cTÜVus mark indicates that the equipment is tested and certified to comply with the electrical
and fire safety regulations controlled by the US and Canadian governments.
Those tests were conducted thoroughly by TÜV Rheinland that is accredited as a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) by OSHA (The Occupational Safety and Health
Administration) in the United States, and by SCC (Standards Council of Canada) in Canada.

2.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)


This device complies with the following IEC (EN) standards:
• IEC61326-2-6:2005 (EN61326-2-6:2006)
Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use - EMC requirements
• EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) For this standard the requirements of class A are fulfilled.
• EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility) For this standard the minimum requirements with regards to immunity are
fulfilled.
• This equipment has been designed and tested to CISPR11 Class A. In a domestic environment it may cause a
radio interference, in which case, you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.

2-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.3 Avoiding infections

Risk of infection
• When performing any task on the instrument, such as testing, maintenance, preparation, or
post processing, be sure to wear adequate personal protective equipment, such as protective
gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat. Also, wash your hands after
completing the process.
There is a risk you might get infected with pathogens.
• Be sure to connect the instrument’s drain tubing to a waste fluid tank at the facility or other
dedicated waste container.
• If connecting the tubing to a waste fluid tank at the facility, use a tank with a nipple to which the
drain tubing can be attached or a tank with other means of securing the tubing in place so as
to avoid the risk of waste fluid spillage. In addition, exercise care so as to avoid such spillage,
for example by regularly verifying that the tube remains properly secured in place.
• Never touch waste, or parts that have come in contact with waste, with your bare hands.
If you inadvertently come in contact with potentially infectious materials or surfaces,
immediately rinse the skin with large amounts of water, then follow your laboratory's
prescribed cleaning and decontamination procedures.
• Use appropriate care when handling samples and quality control materials. In the unlikely
event that some infectious material gets in the eyes or an open wound, rinse with large
amounts of water and seek immediate medical attention.

2-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.4 Handling of reagents

Warning!
• As with the contents of this manual, note carefully the information stated on the reagent
package.
• Avoid direct contact with reagents. Reagents can cause irritation of the eyes, skin and mucous
membranes.
• Should you inadvertently come in contact with a reagent, rinse your skin immediately with
copious amounts of water.
• If a reagent comes in contact with your eye, rinse at once with copious amounts of water and
seek medical attention immediately.
• Follow the instructions in the Safety Data Sheet.
• CELLPACK DCL is conductive. If CELLPACK DCL is spilt inadvertently near electrical cables
or appliances, there is a risk of electric shock. Switch off the device power, unplug the power
cable, and remove the spilt CELLPACK DCL.
• CELLCLEAN AUTO is a strong alkaline cleaning agent. Do not allow it to come into contact
with your skin or clothing. In the event of contact, rinse your skin or clothing with copious
amounts of water to avoid injury and damage.
• CELLCLEAN AUTO contains sodium hypochlorite. If CELLCLEAN AUTO comes into contact
with a surface of the device, it will degrade and possibly corrode the surface finish.
Immediately wipe up the CELLCLEAN AUTO with a damp cloth.
• Methanol and staining solutions that contain methanol are flammable at normal temperatures.
Handle with caution.

Caution!
• Follow all instructions on the reagent container.
• Do not allow dust, dirt or bacteria to contaminate the reagent.
• Do not use a reagent beyond the expiration date.
• Handle reagents gently to avoid foaming. Do not shake! Do not use immediately after a
reagent has been transported.
• Do not spill reagents. If reagent is spilled, wipe it up with a damp cloth.

2-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.5 Maintenance

Risk of infection
Always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat when performing
service and maintenance work. After completion of work, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens.

Warning!
Fragments of glass may occasionally fall into the device. When inserting your hand into the
device, be alert for fragments of glass.

Information
• When performing maintenance, use only the tools specially authorized by Sysmex.
• The maintenance procedures described in this manual enable the device to achieve full
performance. When replacing supply parts and maintenance parts, use only genuine parts
that meet the specifications of the device.

2-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.6 Disposal of waste fluid, waste materials, and the device

Risk of infection
Always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat when handling waste
fluids and consumable supplies. After completion of work, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens.

Warning!
• When disposing of waste fluid, consumable supplies, or the device, follow local regulations for
the disposal of medical waste, contaminated waste, and industrial waste.
• The SP-10 includes batteries that are used for data storage. Remove the batteries before
disposing of the device, and dispose of the batteries in accordance with local regulations.

The battery is located in PCB No. 6374 in the left rear of the main unit.

Battery

PCB No. 6374

This symbol is affixed by the requirement by Article 14. (4) of the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), and
indicates the waste end-of-life equipment should not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and
such equipment shall be collected separately.

2-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.6.1 Waste Disposal

Risk of infection
After becoming waste at the end-of-life, this instrument and its accessories are regarded as
infectious. They are therefore exempted from EU directive 2012/19/EU (Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment Directive) and may not be collected by public recycling to prevent possible
risk of infection of personnel working at those recycling facilities.

Warning!
• Do not dispose of the instrument, accessories and consumables via public recycling.
• Incineration of contaminated parts is recommended.
• Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative and receive further instructions for
disposal.
Follow local legal requirements at all times.

Caution!
Waste fluid from the instrument may contain dangerous substances and the decision about
disposal is made by the local water authority.

2-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.6.2 Decontamination

Warning!
Before decontaminating the instrument, be sure to turn off the power supply and unplug the
power cord. This is necessary to avoid the risk of electric shock. When cleaning the instrument,
always wear protective gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat. Also, wash
hands after decontamination carefully with antiseptic solution first and with soap afterwards. Do
not open the instrument for decontamination inside. This is executed only by Service Technician.

Information
• To ensure decontamination of the instrument outer surfaces, clean the instrument surface at
the end of the daily work. This has to be executed in the following three situations;
- Regularly, at the end of a daily work,
- Immediately, during contamination with potentially infectious material, and
- In advance of repair or maintenance by the field technical service representative.
• Wipe off the instrument surfaces using a cloth soaked with a suitable decontamination
solution. Please use one-way cloths, e.g. made of paper or cellulose. The cloth may be
moistened in a way only that no wetness may reach the inside of the instrument.
• The indicated residence time of the decontamination solution shall be observed.
• If required, you may afterwards remove normal contaminations with commercial neutral
detergent, in case these could not be removed by the decontaminant.
• As a last step the instrument shall be dried with a dry one-way cloth.

2-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.7 Labels on the device


Front of Main Unit
(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

* When using the CV-60

(1)

Warning!
When working with the top cover open, secure it in a position where it is stable. Otherwise, the
cover may fall and injure your head or other part of your body.

(2)

Warning!
Never open this cover when the power is on. Risk of injury.

(3)

Risk of infection
All parts and surfaces of the device are potentially biohazardous.

2-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

(4)

Warning!
Never insert your hand inside the device while it is in operation. Risk of injury by the hand clipper
or other moving part.

2-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

Inside of Top of Main Unit


(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

Caution, Hot!
The instrument may be hot during and immediately after operation.
Do not touch. Risk of burn injury.

2-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

(2)

Warning!
• The top cover locks while the device is in operation. Do not attempt to force it open.
• When working with the top cover open, secure it in a position where it is stable. Otherwise, the
cover may fall and injure your head or other part of your body.
• When closing the top cover, release the stopper.

Stopper

(3)

Warning!
Never insert your hands when the power is on. Risk of injury.

(4)

Caution!
• Do not insert your hands while the main unit is in operation.
• Make sure the slides are oriented in the correct direction when loading in the slide supply
cassette.

(5)

Caution!
• Make sure that a single cassette used for smearing, staining, or manual printing is dry and
does not contain a slide glass.
• Pay attention to the orientation of a single cassette.
• Do not push a single cassette towards you while the device is in operation.

2-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

Rear of Main Unit


(2)

(1)

(5)
(3)

(4)

(1)

Caution!
• Always unplug the power cord before performing inspection. Inspection with the power cord
plugged in is dangerous.
• Always unplug the power cord before replacing a fuse.
• Use a fuse of the specified type and rating.

(2)

Caution!
Do not block the exhaust ports on the rear of the main unit.

(3)

Caution!
The manual shows where the tubing, cables, and power cord should be connected.
For the details on connections, see Chapter 3. (➤P.3-1 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Main unit")

2-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

(4)

Risk of infection
Never touch waste outlet nipples and overflow nipples with your bare hands. If these parts are
contaminated with blood, there is a risk of infection by pathogens. Should you inadvertently
come in contact with potentially infectious materials or surfaces, rinse immediately with copious
amounts of water and follow your hospital or laboratory's prescribed disinfection procedures.

(5)

Caution!
Indicates a potential risk of physical damage to some of the functions of the device caused by
static electricity discharge from the human body, as a result of incorrect operation or failure to
observe this caution.

Pneumatic Unit

(2)

(1) (3)
(2)

Front Back

(1)

Risk of infection
All parts and surfaces of the device are potentially biohazardous.

2-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

(2)

Caution!
• Do not block the exhaust ports on the rear of the pneumatic unit.
• Do not install the pneumatic unit on the same stand as the main unit. Undulations may form in
smears due to vibration.

(3)

Warning!
• Always unplug the power cord before performing inspection.
• Always unplug the power cord before replacing a fuse.
• Use a fuse of the specified type and rating.

Reagent Container

(1)

(1) The meanings of the symbols on the reagent container label are as follows:
DW: DI (rinse) water
M: Methanol

2.8 Operators

Caution!
• The SP-10 is only to be used by sufficiently trained personnel.
• In the event of an device failure, the administrator of the device should take action only within
the scope indicated in the manual. For repairs outside the scope indicated in the manual,
contact your local Sysmex representative.
• Your local Sysmex representative will unpack and install the device at the time of delivery, and
check initial operation.

2-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2.9 HOST connection

Caution!
If orders are downloaded from a host computer, start making smears only after all orders for the
target rack have been downloaded. If smear preparation starts before downloading is
completed, it may happen that smears will be made before an order is received, depending on
the transmission speed. In this event, the smears will be made using the default sample ID
number and default smearing conditions.

2-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 2 Safety Information

2-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

3.1 Main unit


Front

1 3

1 Main power switch


Turns the main power on and off.

Information
• Turning the main power switch off while the device is in operation may cause permanent
damage to the system. Be sure to perform shutdown before turning off the main power switch.
• Do not turn the main power switch on and off repeatedly within a short period of time.

2 Display
This is a 5.7-inch touch panel color LCD.
The display shows the device status, operation menus, and other information. The touch panel can be used
to operate the device.
3 Startup switch
Starts up the device.

Note:
If the device does not start up, check if the main power switch is switched on.

4 Brightness adjustment lever


Adjusts the brightness of the LCD screen.
To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, move the lever to the left or right.

3-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

Back

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
17
18
19
20
21
22
10 23
11 24
12 25
26
13 27
14 28
15 29
30
16
31

1 AC power supply
Supplies power through the provided power cable.
2 Card slot
Slot for inserting a PC card specified by Sysmex.

Information
The program card specified by Sysmex must always be inserted when running the system.

3 Link unit connector


When connecting the DIA (DI-60), attach the connector for connection of the link unit, which acts as a relay
unit between the SP and DIA.

3-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

4 Serial port
Connector for communication with a host computer or other device.
5 RU connector
Connector for the RU reagent supply unit.
6 Conveyor connector
Connector for the conveyor.
7 Hand-held barcode reader connector
Connector for the hand-held barcode reader (optional).
8 LAN connector
Connector for communication with a host computer or other device.
9 Fuse holder
250 V, 8 A (time lag) fuse. Insert only the specified type of fuse.

Specification Part Number Model name Type

117 VAC - 240 VAC 266-7767-7 Fuse 250 V 8 A 50T080H Time lag

Warning!
• Be sure to unplug the power cord before replacing a fuse. Risk of electrical shock.
• Replace only with a fuse of the specified type and rating. Risk of smoke emission.

10 Stain 2 inlet nipple


Stain 2 is aspirated from an external container into a chamber in the device.
11 Stain 1 inlet nipple
Stain 1 is aspirated from an external container into a chamber in the device.
12 Methanol outlet nipple
Methanol is drained from this nipple. Connect to a drain or waste container.
13 Stain 1 outlet nipple
Methanol and stain 1 from chambers 1 and 2 are drained via this nipple. Connect to a drain or waste
container.
14 Stain 2 outlet nipple
Stain 2 and methanol are discharged via this nipple. Connect to a drain or waste container.
15 Waste outlet nipple 3
Waste fluid (mostly stains 1 and 2, phosphate buffer, and methanol) from waste chamber 3 is discharged
via this nipple. Connect to a drain or waste container.
16 Waste outlet nipple 1
Waste fluid (mostly CELLPACK DCL and blood) from waste chamber 1 is discharged via this nipple.
Connect to a drain or waste container.
17 Methanol inlet nipple
Methanol is aspirated via this nipple. Connect directly to the methanol container.

3-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

18 Buffer or rinse water inlet nipple


Rinse water or phosphate buffer for rinsing is aspirated via this nipple. Connect directly to the external
container.
19 DCL inlet nipple
CELLPACK DCL is aspirated via this nipple. Connect directly to the external container.
20 Buffer inlet nipple
Diluent phosphate buffer is aspirated via this nipple. Connect directly to the external container.
21 Rinse water inlet nipple
Rinse water is aspirated from the external container into a chamber in the device.
22 Pressure inlet joint
Connects to the air dryer outlet joint.
23 Pneumatic unit control connector
Connector for controlling pneumatic unit on/off. The pneumatic unit control cable connects to this
connector.
24 Waste sensor 1 connector
If the waste sensor (optional) is installed, this connects to waste sensor 1 (waste of waste outlet nipples 2
and 3 and staining solution waste).
25 (Unused connector)
26 Waste sensor 2 connector
If the waste sensor (optional) is installed, this connects to waste sensor 2 (waste of waste outlet nipple 1).
27 Float switch connector
Connects to the float switch for the buffer and rinse water bottle.
28 Vacuum inlet joint
Connects to the vacuum output nipple of the pneumatic unit.
29 Air filter drain nipple
Connects to the air filter drain.
30 Overflow nipple
Connects to the overflow tubing for the blood dispensing pipette rinse cup, spreader glass rinse cup, and
stain table.
31 Waste outlet nipple 2
Waste fluid (mostly stains 1 and 2, phosphate buffer, and methanol) from waste chamber 2 is discharged
via this nipple. Connect to a drain or waste container.

3-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

Top

4
2

1 Single cassette feed-out table


Table for ejection of single cassettes containing slides.
2 Top cover
Open to install a slide supply cassette.
3 Stain cover
Open to perform stain tank maintenance.

Warning!
The stain cover locks while the device is in operation. Do not attempt to force it open.

4 Micro collection sample tube holder cover


Open to make a manual open sample.
5 Single cassette supply table
Single cassettes are placed on this table. Up to 100 cassettes can be placed at once.

3-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

Right Side

2
3

1 Trap chamber
Prevents reagents from flowing back into the pneumatic unit when a malfunction occurs in the device.
2 0.05 MPa regulator
Adjusts the pressure to 0.05 MPa.
3 Bellows unit
Adjusts the bellows (vacuum) pressure to -0.053 MPa.

3-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

Top Interior
1
2

14

3
15
4 16
5 17

6 18
19
7 20
8
21
9 22

10

11
12 23
13 24
25
26
1 Single cassette feed-out unit
Feeds a dried smear sample to the single cassette storage unit.
2 Single cassette storage unit
Sends smear samples to the single cassette feed-out table.
3 Rinse pipette
Rinses smears after staining.
4 Stain table
Conveys single cassettes during the staining process.
5 Manual open sample holder
Holds the sample when making a smear in manual open mode.
6 Dispensing pipette
Dispenses blood evenly over a wide area so that a stable smear can be made on the slide glass based on
the Hct value.
7 Stain pipette 3
Dispenses diluent for stain 2 into the single cassette after the staining solution and rinse solution are drained.

3-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

8 Stain pipette 2
Collects stain 1 and dispenses the diluent or rinse solution for stain 1.
9 Stain pipette 1
After the slide is lifted, this dispenses stain 1 into the single cassette. The slide is returned to the single
cassette, and then lifted and dried by a fan.
10 Methanol pipette
After the slide is lifted, this dispenses methanol into the single cassette. The slide is then returned to the
single cassette.
11 Staining process feed-in unit
Feeds the smear to the staining process.
12 Piercer
Holds the sample tube and aspirates the blood.
13 Mixer unit
The mixer hand mixes samples by inversion.
14 Dispensing and smearing position
Position where blood is dispensed and smeared.
15 Smear unit
The smear unit prepares a smear with the angle and speed of the spreader glass adjusted to one of eight
levels based on the Hct value.
16 Smear drier unit
The smear drier unit dries the sample after it is smeared.
17 Slide print position
Position where the printer prints sample information on the glass after the smear is made.
18 Printer
Prints sample information on the frosted part of the slide glass.
19 Slide glass shift unit
This unit transfers the slide glass to the dispensing and smearing position, and then to the smear drier unit.
20 Slide glass supply unit
This unit transfers the slide glass from the removal position to the slide glass shift unit.
21 Slide storage position
Position where a smeared and printed sample is stored in a single cassette.
22 Single cassette rotator
This rotates the single cassette in order to store the sample in the single cassette.
23 Slide 1
Slide supply cassette 1 is installed here.
24 Slide removal position
Slides are removed from the slide supply cassette at this position based on the slide usage settings.
25 Single cassette shift unit
Transfers a sample stored in a single cassette to the methanol pipette.
26 Slide 2
Slide supply cassette 2 is installed here.

3-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

3.2 Pneumatic unit


1 3 4

5
6

Front Back
7

1 0.25 MPa regulator


Adjusts the 0.25 MPa pressure supplied to the analyzer.
2 Pilot lamp
Illuminates when the pneumatic unit power is on.
3 Pressure output nipple
Supplies pressure to the main unit. Connects to the pressure inlet joint of the air filter on the main unit.
4 Vacuum output nipple
Supplies vacuum pressure to the main unit. Connects to the vacuum inlet joint on the main unit.
5 Fuse
Use only with fuses of the specified type and current rating.

Specification Part Number Model name Type

100 VAC - 117 VAC 266-5011-3 Fuse 250 V 4 A ST4-4A-N1 Time lag

220 VAC - 240 VAC AY579418 Fuse 250 V 3.15 A 02183.15MXP Time lag

Warning!
• Be sure to unplug the power cord before replacing a fuse.
Risk of electrical shock.
• Replace only with a fuse of the specified type and rating.
Risk of smoke emission.

6 Power connector
Supplies power through the provided power cord.

3-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

7 Pneumatic unit control cable


Cable for controlling on/off of pneumatic unit. Connects to the pneumatic unit control connector on the main
unit.

3.3 Sampler (optional)

1 4

2 5

1 Measurement line
The racks are automatically shifted to the left one sample position at a time. The sample ID is scanned and
the sample is caught by the sample hand on this line.
2 Sampler left rack pool
Racks are sent here from the measurement line.
3 CP cover
Protective cover for the piercer and associated moving parts.
4 Sample volume detection sensor
Monitors the blood volume in the sample tube.
5 Sampler right rack pool
Racks are placed here. Up to five racks can be placed at once. When [Start] is pressed, the racks are
automatically sent to the measurement line.

3-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

3.4 Screen configuration


The SP-10 screen is a 5.7-inch touch panel color LCD, and consists of the system status area, the data processing
area, and the operation area.

System status area

Data processing area

Operation area

● System status area


This shows the screen name, system status indicator, and Help button.
System status indicator
Slide presence indicator

Screen name Operation mode


SP-10 logo Help button

Screen name Shows the name of the screen that currently appears in the data display area.
System status indicator The status of the device is shown as indicated below.
[Ready] The device is ready to make smears.
[Asp. Ready] The device is making a smear, but is ready to start aspirating the next sample.
[Running] The device is making a smear.
[Not Ready] The device is not ready to make smears.
Operation mode Shows the operation mode set in the operation mode settings.
Slide presence indicator Indicates by color if slide supply cassette 1 and slide supply cassette 2 have
slides.
Green: There are slides.
Red: There are no slides.
Help button Touch this button when an error occurs to display the error list screen.

3-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

● Data processing area


Shows the data of each screen. Data can be viewed and input.
Vertical and horizontal cursor buttons are displayed as necessary.
These enable the following operations to be performed:
• Move the cursor.
• Scroll through a list. Data processing area
• Switch to other screens.

Note:
Hold down the up/down cursor button to scroll the page.

● Operation area
Shows messages and buttons for the screen displayed in the data
processing area.

3-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

3.5 Menu screen


This screen is used to start various functions.

[Worklist] Touch to start the sample registration function. This lets you register samples
and conditions for smear preparation.
[Sampler] / [Conv. int.] When a sampler is connected, [Sampler] appears. Touch to open the sampler
smear preparation screen. When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, [Conv.
int.] will appear. Touch to open the conveyor interrupt screen. In cases other
than the above, this is grayed out.
[Manual] Touch to start the manual smear preparation function to manually prepare
smears.
[SmearList] Touch to start the smear list function. This shows information on previously
completed smears and smears currently being prepared.
[Status] Touch to start the status display function. This shows the operation status of the
device.
[Settings] Touch to open the Settings screen. This lets you configure various settings
selected from the setting menu.
[Maint.] Touch to open the main maintenance screen of the device. Various
maintenance tasks can be performed from this screen.
[Shutdown] Touch to display the shutdown screen to prepare the system for power off.

Note:
If SP-10 is part of the XN-3000 or XN-9000 systems, then refer to the XN-3000 or XN-9000
manuals for information about functionality and operations.

3-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

3.6 Numeric keypad dialogs


When an item requiring input (input box) is touched, one of the four numeric keypad dialogs described below will
appear.

● Numeric keypad dialog


Numbers and a decimal point can be entered (up to the specified maximum
number of digits).
If you enter more than the maximum number of digits, an alarm will sound and the
entry will not be accepted.

[0] to [9] Touch one of these keys to enter the number indicated on the key.
[.] Touch to enter a decimal point.
If this is the first key you touch, a "0" is automatically entered to the left of the
decimal point to display "0.".
Multiple decimal points cannot be entered.
[C] When all digits are highlighted blue, this can be touched to clear the input box to
[0].
While entering a number, this can be touched to delete the last digit entered.
[Entr] Touch to finalize the entry and close the numeric keypad dialog.

3-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

● Alphanumeric keypad dialog


Letters of the alphabet, numbers and a hyphen [-] can be entered (up to the specified maximum number of
digits).
If you enter more than the maximum number of digits, an alarm will sound and the entry will not be accepted.

[0] to [9] Touch one of these keys to enter the number indicated on the key.
[-] Touch to enter a hyphen.
[C] When the entire text string is highlighted blue, this can be touched to delete the
entire text string.
While entering characters, this can be touched to delete the last character
entered.
When all characters are deleted, only the cursor is displayed.
[ALPH] Touch to change the input mode.
This key is displayed in numeric input mode. Touch to change to upper case
alphabet input mode.
[alph] Touch to change the input mode.
This key is displayed in upper case alphabet input mode. Touch to change to
lower case alphabet input mode.
[NUM] Touch to change the input mode.
This key is displayed in lower case alphabet input mode. Touch to change to
numeric input mode.
[Entr] Touch after entering a letter to finalize that letter.
When all characters have been finalized, touch to finalize the text string and
close the alphanumeric keypad dialog.
[ABC] to [QZ] Press one of these keys to enter a character on the key. An entered character
[abc] to [qz] will initially be unfinalized and highlighted in blue.
Each time you press the same key, the unfinalized character changes to the
next letter on the key, e.g., [A] → [B] → [C] → [A]. To finalize the character,
press any other key except [C]. The highlighting will be removed.

3-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

● Time keypad dialog


A four-digit number and [:] can be entered.
The entry will be checked after it is finalized. If you entered an invalid number (such as
"70" seconds), the original entry will be restored and an alarm will sound.

[0] to [9] Touch one of these keys to enter the number indicated on the key.
[:] Touch to enter a separator.
[C] When all digits are highlighted blue, this can be touched to delete all digits.
While entering a number, this can be touched to delete the last digit entered.
[Entr] Touch to finalize the entry and close the time keypad dialog.

3.7 Status display


When [Status] is touched in the menu screen, the status display screen appears.
The status display screen consists of four screens that show the status of the smear preparation process.
To switch through the screens, touch [<<] or [>>].
Smear process status display screen Staining process status display screen

Solenoid valve / sensor status display screen Pressure/temperature/humidity status display screen

To exit status display and return to the menu screen, touch [Return].

3-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

● Smear process status display screen

[Completed] The number of slides ordered since the device was started (including the ones
which have been cancelled) is displayed. When the device is restarted, this
number is reset.
[Making slide] Displays the number of smears being made in the device (from sample
aspiration to transfer of the cassette to the slide dispenser).
[Sample ID] Shows the ID of the sample being processed in the smear process.
[Creation Num.] Shows the number of slides being made from the sample being processed.
[Query] Shows the reason for making slides from the sample being processed.
[Manual] Preparation by manually input order
[Host] Preparation by host order
[Positive] Prepared because the hematological analysis result was positive.
[Default] The slide will be prepared according to the instrument settings because there is
no order.
[Level] Shows the smear level of the sample being processed.
When two slides are made, the smear level of the first slide and the smear level
of the second slide are separated by [/].
[Smear] Shows the position of the slide from completion of the smearing process to
entry into the staining process.
[●] appears if there is a slide. Nothing appears if there is no slide.

3-17
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

● Staining process status display screen


The items shown in this screen vary depending on the staining mode (single staining or double staining), and
the length of the time axis varies depending on the staining conditions.

[Methanol] Shows the methanol process in real-time.


[Stain1] Shows the stain 1 process in real-time.
[Stain1 dil] Shows the stain 1 dilution process in real-time.
[Stain2 dil] Shows the stain 2 dilution process in real-time.
[Rinse] Shows the rinse process in real-time.
[Dry] Shows the drying process in real-time.

Progress display methods

Status Display Meaning

Initial state The time scale has graduations of 1 minute. The numbers above the
scale indicate minutes.

Process started A bar appears at the left to indicate that the sample has entered the
process.

The next sample The bar of each sample that has entered the process moves to the
has entered the right as time elapses. When the next sample enters the process,
staining process another bar appears at the left.

Error When an error occurs, the sample for which the error occurred is
indicated by a red bar. Once an error occurs, the sample will continue
to be indicated by a red bar even after the error is resolved.

3-18
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

● Pressure/temperature/humidity status display screen

[0.25 MPa P] Indicates the 0.25 MPa pressure reading.


[0.05 MPa P] Indicates the 0.05 MPa pressure reading.
[0.053 MPa V] Indicates the 0.053 MPa vacuum reading.
[Outside temp] Indicates the ambient temperature.
[Heater temp] Indicates the temperature inside the drier unit.
[Humidity] Indicates the ambient humidity.

● Solenoid valve / sensor status display screen

[0] Indicates that the solenoid valve and sensor are on.
[-] Indicates that the solenoid valve and sensor are off.

3-19
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 3 Part Names and Functions

3.8 List of menu items

Startup

Menu Worklist

HC Query

Delete

Sampler

Conv. int.

Manual

Smear List

DispSlct

Search

Output

Delete

Status

Settings

System

Device

Cond.

Intface

Sampler

Backup

Maint.

Reagent replace

Spreader glass

Rinse

Test Operation

History

Version info.

Shutdown

Help

3-20
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 4 Reagents

Chapter 4 Reagents

This chapter explains the reagents used with the device.


The following stains, buffers and rinsing agents are recommended for use on the SP-10:
• May-Grünwald stain
• Wright's stain
• Giemsa stain
• Phosphate buffer
• Rinse water

4.1 Storage and shelf life of reagents

Note:
Follow good laboratory practice to assure that stains, buffers and rinsing agents are properly
stored and prepared as indicated by specific manufacture of the product(s).

The storage temperature and shelf life of the reagents are indicated below.

CELLPACK DCL
Rinse solution used to rinse the whole blood aspiration line.

Storage temperature 2 to 35°C


Shelf life before opening As indicated on container
Shelf life after opening Maximum 60 days

Caution!
• When replacing the reagent, do not refill and use the same container.
• Do not use expired reagents, as the rinsing performance cannot be guaranteed.
• If the reagent is removed after it has been connected (i.e. opened), it may become
contaminated with bacteria and other particles, causing its performance to deteriorate.
Therefore, reconnecting an open reagent is not recommended.
• NEVER use this reagent on human body. Avoid contact with skin and eyes, and avoid
ingestion. If it comes in contact with the skin, rinse skin thoroughly. If it gets in the eye, rinse
with large amounts of water, and seek immediate medical attention. In the unlikely event that it
was ingested, seek immediate medical attention.
• Used containers are considered industrial waste, and waste fluids, including samples, are
considered medical waste. Therefore, they must be disposed in accordance with the
regulations pertaining to waste materials.

4-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 4 Reagents

May-Grünwald stain (procured locally)


Stain used to stain blood smears.

Storage temperature Indicated in the package insert


Shelf life before opening As indicated on package
Shelf life after opening Maximum 3 months

Warning!
May-Grünwald stain contains methanol and is classified as a flammable and toxic substance.
Store it in a safety container in accordance with your local laws and regulations. It is flammable
at normal temperatures. Handle with caution.

Wright's stain (procured locally)


Stain used to stain blood smears.

Storage temperature Indicated in the package insert


Shelf life before opening As indicated on package
Shelf life after opening Maximum 3 months

Warning!
Wright's stain contains methanol and is classified as a flammable and toxic substance. Store it in
a safety container in accordance with your local laws and regulations. It is flammable at normal
temperatures. Handle with caution.

Giemsa stain (procured locally)


Stain used to stain blood smears.

Storage temperature Indicated in the package insert


Shelf life before opening As indicated on package
Shelf life after opening Maximum 3 months

Warning!
Giemsa stain contains methanol and is classified as a flammable and toxic substance. Store it in
a safety container in accordance with your local laws and regulations. It is flammable at normal
temperatures. Handle with caution.

4-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 4 Reagents

Phosphate buffer (procured locally)


Buffer used for the preparation of blood smears.

Storage temperature Indicated in the package insert


Shelf life before opening As indicated on container
Shelf life after opening Maximum 3 months

CELLCLEAN AUTO
CELLCLEAN AUTO is a strong alkaline detergent that is used to remove residual reagent, cellular residuals and
blood proteins remaining in the hydraulic system of the automated hematology slide preparation unit.
Store in a dark place and do not allow exposure to direct sunlight. Excessive exposure to direct sunlight will
cause the chlorine component to degrade, resulting in a loss of detergent strength.

Storage temperature 1 to 30°C


Shelf life before opening As indicated on container
Disposal procedures • After use, there will be a hole in the film that seals the top of the tube.
Exercise caution, as residual fluid may leak from the hole.
• Disposal procedures should meet requirements of applicable local
regulations.

Warning!
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. In case of skin contact, flush the area with water. In case of
contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice immediately.
Before use, please read the Safety Data Sheet carefully.

Information
Please procure the methanol yourself.

Rinse water
Detergent used when preparing smears.
Use ion-exchanged water or an equivalent detergent with no fluctuations of pH.

4-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 4 Reagents

4.2 Symbols used on the labels


Signs and symbols used on reagent containers and packages are as follows:

Caution!
Important information about the handling of reagents is noted on their containers or the package
insert. Use the reagents after fully understanding the descriptions.

In vitro diagnostic medical device Catalogue number

Manufacturer Keep away from sunlight

Authorised Representative in the


Use no hooks
European Community

Consult instructions for use This way up

Temperature limitation Keep dry

Biological risks Stacking limit by number

Use by Fragile, handle with care

Batch code Corrugated recycles

The design of the symbols may differ from the actual product.

4-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 5 Sample Registration

Chapter 5 Sample Registration

This chapter explains the procedures for registering samples and conditions for smear preparation.
Up to 850 samples can be stored. When the number of samples reaches 850, each newly registered sample
will automatically delete the oldest sample.
When a sample order is processed normally, it will be automatically deleted from the list.

5.1 Terms used in slide preparation

5.1.1 Sample No.


A sample number is a number and text string up to 15 digits in length that is assigned to a sample. Sample
numbers are used to identify samples.
Sample numbers can be acquired by any one of the following methods:
• Manual input
• Reading sample tube barcodes with a barcode reader
• Automatic assignment (when a barcode read error occurs, etc.)
• Inquiry to host computer

5.1.2 Rack No./tube position


A rack number is a 6-digit number that identifies a rack. Rack numbers can be acquired by any one of the
following methods:
• Manual input
• Reading rack barcodes with a barcode reader
• Automatic assignment (when a barcode read error occurs, etc.)

The sample tube position is a two-digit number that defines the sample tube position in a rack. There are 10
sample tube positions in a rack. Sample tube positions are assigned from the right side in the order "01, 02, 03,
...".

5-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 5 Sample Registration

5.2 Register slide screen


To display the [Register Slide] screen, touch [Worklist] in the menu screen.
The [Register Slide] screen shows a list of registered information.
To show items that do not currently appear in the list, touch [←] or [→].
To move the cursor up or down through the list, touch [↑] or [↓].
If [↑] or [↓] is touched when the cursor is at the top or bottom of the list, the
list scrolls.

[Number] Shows the number of samples currently registered.


[Pos] Indicates the index number of the sample marked by the cursor.
[SAMPLE ID] Shows the sample ID number of up to 15 digits.
[NUM] Shows the number of slides to be prepared.
[Cancel] None
[1] 1 slides
[2] 2 slides
[LEVEL] Shows the smear level as a number from 1 to 16.
(Smear levels 9 to 16 can only be specified when the host computer is connected.)
When 2 slides are ordered, the first order and the second order are separated
by [/].
[SLIDE] Shows the slide position.
[-] indicates that the position is not specified.
When 2 slides are ordered, the first order and the second order are separated
by [/].

Note:
For the details on the smear level, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-40 "Chapter 8: 8.8 Default settings list")

5-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 5 Sample Registration

5.3 Registering a new sample


Not part of routine operations. This procedure can be followed in situations where host connection is unavailable, not
available for prolonged period or a barcode is unavailable with sample tube.
Follow the steps below to register new sample preparation information.

1 Touch [Regist] in the [Register Slide] screen.


The [New Register] screen appears.

2 Touch and configure each registration item.

[Sample ID.] Enter the sample ID of the sample.


The alphanumeric keypad dialog will open. Up to 15 alphanumeric characters
can be entered, including hyphens.
[Smear Level] Set the smear level.
Touch to set one of the following levels:
[Level1] to [Level8] ([Level1] to [Level16] can be set when the host is connected.)
[Slide] Set the slide position.
Touch to select [Either], [Pos.1], or [Pos.2].
[No. of Slide] Set the number of slides to be prepared.
Touch to select [0], [1], or [2].
[Repeat] Specify the number of repetitions.
Touch to open the numeric keypad, and specify 1 to 1,000 repetitions.

Note:
For the details on the smear level, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-40 "Chapter 8: 8.8 Default settings list")

5-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 5 Sample Registration

3 Touch [Register] or [Repeat].

[Register] Touch to register the sample (one sample) and return to the [New Register]
screen.
[Repeat] Touch to register the number of samples specified in [Repeat] using the
configured settings, and return to the [New Register] screen.

Information
If you attempt to register a sample using a sample ID
number that is already registered, a dialog box appears
asking you if you want to overwrite the previously
registered sample.
To overwrite the previously registered sample, touch [OK].
When registering using repeat registration, the dialog box
appears each time there is a previously registered sample
with the same sample ID. When [OK] is touched, repeat
registration resumes.

Note:
When repeat registration is performed, the information is registered as follows:
• The sample ID number is incremented by 1 starting from the set number each time registration
is repeated. The number of sample ID numbers registered will be equal to the number of
repetitions. If the last digit of the sample ID number is other than a number, repeat registration
cannot be performed.
• The information set for items other than the sample ID number is copied a number of times
equal to the number of repetitions.

5-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 5 Sample Registration

5.4 Host computer inquiry


Using the sample ID numbers of all registered orders as keywords, an inquiry can be sent to the host to obtain smear
preparation information.

1 Touch [Select] in the [Register Slide] screen.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [HC Query].


The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [Download].
Using the sample ID numbers of the registered orders as keywords,
downloading of the sample preparation information from the host
starts.
The progress of the download appears in the [HC Query] screen.
When the download finishes, the screen returns to the [Register Slide]
screen.

Note:
Even if [Stop] is touched to cancel the download, any orders that have already been downloaded
will be registered.

5-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 5 Sample Registration

5.5 Deleting smear information


Follow the steps below to delete registered sample information.

1 Move the cursor to the registered information in the [Register Slide] screen
list that you want to delete.

2 Touch [Select].
The select menu opens.

3 Touch [Delete].
The screen on the right appears.

[All] Deletes all registered sample information.


[Highlight] Deletes only the sample information that is selected
by the cursor.

4 Select the information that you want to delete.


The dialog box on the right appears.

5 Touch [OK].
The selected information is deleted from the list.

5-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.1 Startup procedure

6.1.1 Inspection before turning on the power

Checking the reagents


Verify that sufficient reagents will be available for the samples before starting the system. The system will
automatically stop and alert operator if reagent runs out during smear preparation process. Operations will
resume once reagent is added and reagent replacement is performed. For the required volumes of the reagents,
see below.
* The reagent quantities below are effective when the dye conditions are set to the default values.

Reagent volumes used to prepare one smear


Double staining (when phosphate buffer is used to rinse samples stained with stain 1)

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 6 mL Approx. 6.65 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 0.25 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 12 mL Approx. 18 mL

Rinse water Approx. 27 mL

Double staining (when rinse water is used to rinse samples stained with stain 1)

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 6 mL Approx. 6.65 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 0.25 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 6 mL Approx. 12 mL

Rinse water Approx. 33 mL

6-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Single staining

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 6.65 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 6 mL

Rinse water Approx. 27 mL

When methanol prefix is performed


Double staining (when phosphate buffer is used to rinse samples stained with stain 1)

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 6 mL Approx. 6.65 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 0.25 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 12 mL Approx. 18 mL

Rinse water Approx. 27 mL

Methanol Approx. 6 mL

Double staining (when rinse water is used to rinse samples stained with stain 1)

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 6 mL Approx. 6.65 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 0.25 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 6 mL Approx. 12 mL

Rinse water Approx. 33 mL

Methanol Approx. 6 mL

Single staining

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 6.65 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 6 mL

Rinse water Approx. 27 mL

Methanol Approx. 6 mL

6-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Reagent volumes used at startup


Double staining (The reagent quantities below are effective when rinsing by phosphate buffer is performed after
dyeing by dye 1. When water rinsing is performed, the volume of phosphate buffer decreases by 6 mL and the
volume of rinse water increases by 6 mL.)
Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 45 mL Approx. 46 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 6 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 60 mL Approx. 66 mL

Rinse water Approx. 28 mL

Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 220 mL Approx. 221 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 83 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 186 mL Approx. 192 mL

Rinse water Approx. 28 mL

Single staining
Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 46 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 30 mL

Rinse water Approx. 67 mL

Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 221 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 75 mL

Rinse water Approx. 66 mL

6-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

When methanol prefix is performed


Double staining (The reagent quantities below are effective when rinsing by phosphate buffer is performed after
dyeing by dye 1. When water rinsing is performed, the volume of phosphate buffer decreases by 6 mL and the
volume of rinse water increases by 6 mL.)
Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 45 mL Approx. 46 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 6 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 60 mL Approx. 66 mL

Rinse water Approx. 28 mL

Methanol Approx. 24 mL

Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 204 mL Approx. 205 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 42 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 186 mL Approx. 192 mL

Rinse water Approx. 28 mL

Methanol Approx. 24 mL

Single staining
Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 46 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 30 mL

Rinse water Approx. 67 mL

Methanol Approx. 24 mL

6-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Stain 1 Approx. 221 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 75 mL

Rinse water Approx. 66 mL

Methanol Approx. 24 mL

Reagent volumes used in [Shutdown1]


Double staining

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 149 mL

Stain 1 Not used

Stain 2 Not used

Phosphate buffer Not used

Rinse water Approx. 67 mL

CELLCLEAN AUTO Approx. 4 mL (1 vial)

Methanol Approx. 190 mL

Single staining

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 149 mL

Stain 1 Not used

Phosphate buffer Not used

Rinse water Approx. 67 mL

CELLCLEAN AUTO Approx. 4 mL (1 vial)

Methanol Approx. 130 mL

6-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Reagent volumes used in [Shutdown2]


Double staining

Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 149 mL

Stain 1 Not used

Stain 2 Not used

Phosphate buffer Not used

Rinse water Approx. 28 mL

CELLCLEAN AUTO Approx. 4 mL (1 vial)

Methanol Approx. 445 mL

Single staining

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 149 mL

Stain 1 Not used

Phosphate buffer Not used

Rinse water Approx. 48 mL

CELLCLEAN AUTO Approx. 4 mL (1 vial)

Methanol Approx. 315 mL

Precautions when replacing reagents

Caution!
• Always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat when replacing
reagents. If stain solution comes into contact with your skin, your skin will be stained purple
and the stain cannot easily be removed.
• Leave the reagent at room temperature (15 - 30°C) for at least 24 hours before use.
• When handling a reagent that may have frozen, follow the precautions given on the package.
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.
• When replacing the reagent container, make sure there is no dust or other contaminants on
the intake tube and float switch. Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic
examination.
• Take care not to spill the reagent. If reagent is spilled, wipe it up immediately with a damp
cloth. Spilled reagent may cause discoloration of the surface on which it spills.

6-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Inspect the device


Check the tubing and cables. Make sure that the tubing is not bent or disconnected and the power cord is firmly
plugged into the outlet.

Inspect the sampler


If a sampler is installed, make sure that there are no racks on the measurement line of the sampler. If any racks
are found, remove from the line.
If you are using the XN-3000 or XN-9000, see the manuals for the XN-3000 or XN-9000.

Inspect the waste container


If a waste container is installed, dispose of any waste fluid that has collected in the waste container.

6.1.2 Turn power ON


Verify that there are a minimum of 8 single cassettes on the system before startup is performed.
Press the startup switch on the right side of the display on the front of the device.

Information
When placing the sample cassette, place so that the cut-out at the bottom of the cassette is
away from you.
If the cassette is in the wrong orientation, correct operation will not be possible.
Single
cassette

Note:
• The pneumatic unit power is controlled by the device, and does not need to be turned on and
off.
• If the device does not start up, check if the main power switch is switched on.

6-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.1.3 Startup process


When the power is turned on, the device performs a system check, shutdown check, and mechanical
initialization sequence. If an error message appears during the startup sequence, touch the Help button and
follow the instructions in the action message. For the details on action messages, see Chapter 10.
(➤P.10-2 "Chapter 10: 10.3 Action messages")

Information
If an error message appears, resume operation only after correcting the error.

Note:
It will take about 15 minutes to complete the startup process.

System check
During the system check, the following stored data files are checked:
• Sample data file
• Order registration file
• Settings file
• Error history file
• Maintenance history file
If a stored data file is corrupted, an error dialog appears indicating
which file is corrupted.

Shutdown check
The shutdown check checks if the device was properly shut down the
last time it was used.
If shutdown was not performed correctly, an error dialog appears.

Note:
The startup process will not resume until [OK] is touched in the shutdown error dialog.

6-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Notification of replacement time


If it is time to replace the spreader glass or a reagent has expired, a
dialog appears after the startup process is finished.

Startup completed
When startup is completed, the menu screen appears.

6.1.4 Loading slide glasses


Insert slide glasses in Cassette No. 5 and place in the device with the frosted part toward the inside of the device.
The following slides glasses can be used:
• Size: 76 mm x 26 mm or 75 mm x 25 mm
• Thickness: 0.9 to 1.2 mm
Frosted part

• Length of frosted part: 15 to 20 mm


25 - 26

• Corner finish: Cut and rounded edges


• Use of Sysmex recommended slides will provide optimal performance.
Consult your local dealer or Sysmex representative for more 15 - 20
information. 75 - 76

Information
If you need to use a 75 mm x 25 mm slide glass, the slide conveyor must be modified. To have
the settings changed, contact your local Sysmex representative.

6-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.2 Preparing smears with stand alone configuration


When preparing smears with stand alone configuration, mixing of the sample, aspiration, smearing, and staining
are all performed automatically.

Note:
Stand alone configuration requires an auto-sampler (optional) to be installed.

6.2.1 Collecting and preparing samples


A specified amount of blood, which depends on the amount of EDTA anticoagulant, must be collected by the
venipuncture method.

Caution!
• Some anticoagulants may cause hemolysis or platelet aggregation, and it will not be possible
to prepare smears that are suitable for microscopic examination. It is recommended that you
use one of the following anticoagulants: EDTA-2K, EDTA-3K, EDTA-2Na.
• Before processing samples that have been refrigerated, let the samples sit about 30 minutes
at room temperature. Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic
examination.

Required blood sample volumes for smear preparation are shown below.

Sample tube diameter Raised Bottom


Tube (RBT)
12 mm 15 mm

Required sample volume 0.6 - 5 mL 0.8 - 7 mL 360 - 500 μL

Aspirated sample volume Approx. 200 μL

Caution!
Raised Bottom Tubes can be used if the SP-10 is connected in the XN-3000 or XN-9000 or used
in manual smear preparation.
Note that Raised Bottom Tubes cannot be used in standalone sampler analysis of the SP-10
(when an optional sampler is connected).

6-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.2.2 Sample tubes

Regular sample tubes d

Diameter (a) φ11 to 15 mm


Length (b) At least 57 mm
Length including the cap (c) 70 to 85 mm
Cap diameter (d) φ18 mm or less c
b

* Except for when performing micro analysis, use the tube with the cap on.

Micro collection sample tubes


For the compatible micro collection sample tube sizes for the adapters No. 176
and No. 177, see the table below.

Adapter No. 176 Adapter No. 177 g


f
Diameter (e) φ7.4 to 8.5 mm φ9.8 to 10.8 mm
Length (f) 30 mm or less 33 mm or less
Length (g) 45 mm or less 48 mm or less e

Raised Bottom Tube (RBT)


A microtube that can be used in sampler analysis. Compatible dimensions are the same as regular sample tubes.

Caution!
• To use Raised Bottom Tubes, contact your local Sysmex representative. They may not be
available depending on the software version.
• Raised Bottom Tubes can be used if the SP-10 is connected in the XN-3000 or XN-9000 or used
in manual smear preparation.
Note that Raised Bottom Tubes cannot be used in standalone sampler analysis of the SP-10
(when an optional sampler is connected).

Information
• Use only sample tubes that are compatible with the device. The use of non-compatible sample
tubes will cause problems such as incorrect gripping of sample tubes by the hand clipper and
inaccurate monitoring of the blood volume by the blood detection sensor.
• Make sure the specified volume of blood is aspirated into the sample tube. If an insufficient
volume is aspirated, the vacuum in the sample tube will be higher and may prevent the blood
from being aspirated into the device.

6-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.2.3 Racks
You can only use Sysmex 10-tube racks.
If the diameter of the sample tube is less than φ14 mm, attach a dedicated adapter onto the rack.

55 mm

200 mm

25 mm

Caution!
• To use Raised Bottom Tubes, place the tubes in a dedicated Raised Bottom Tube rack (RBT
rack).
Please note the following.
- Do not insert a Raised Bottom Tube in anything other than an RBT rack.
- Do not insert a sample tube other than a Raised Bottom Tube in an RBT rack.
Otherwise, the tip of the needle could hit the bottom of the sample tube, which may lead to
damages of the piercer or other instrument failures.
• Raised Bottom Tubes can be used if the SP-10 is connected in the XN-3000 or XN-9000 or
used in manual smear preparation.
Note that Raised Bottom Tubes cannot be used in standalone sampler analysis of the SP-10
(when an optional sampler is connected).

6.2.4 Registering sample with stand alone SP-10


Before preparing smears, the sample information must be registered in the device.
The sample information can be registered using a barcode, or by direct entry.

Affixing a barcode label


In order for the barcode to be read accurately, the barcode label must be affixed in the correct position.
This section explains how to affix barcode labels to sample tubes and racks.
For detailed barcode label specifications, see Chapter 13.
(➤P.13-1 "Chapter 13: 13.1 ID barcode specifications")

Warning!
Affix the bar code label so that the bars on the label are horizontal when the rack is placed on
the sampler. If the barcode label is slanted, the potential for incorrect reading of the barcode
increases.

6-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Information
• When using barcodes, use a check digit whenever possible. If a check digit is not used, the
potential for incorrect reading of a barcode increases.
• Sample tubes with multiple labels, or labels which are not flat and smooth on the tube or not in
the correct position, may prevent proper gripping of the sample tube, or prevent the sample
tube from being returned to its position in the rack, or otherwise interfere with sample handling.
This may result in sample misidentification. To prevent misidentification, pay close attention to
the following:
- Labels must be affixed in the proper position.
- Do not affix multiple labels.
- Ensure that labels are flat and smooth on the tube.
- Make sure that the barcode label does not peel off the tube.
(Do not use a bar code label that easily peels off.)
- Make sure that the labeled tubes can be picked up from and returned to
the rack smoothly.
- Do not write any text in the margins of a barcode label.

Sample tube (sample number barcode)


Affix the label so that the barcode fits inside the range
shown in the figure on the right. When placing sample tubes 5 mm
in the rack, position the sample tubes so that all barcodes or more
are visible through the slits in the rack. 48 mm
or less

5 mm
21 mm or more
16 mm
or more
or more

Rack (rack number barcode)


The barcode labels come in sets of 2 for each rack number. Affix the label with printed text to the side of the rack
for verification purposes.

9.5 mm 16 mm

3 mm

39 mm 45 mm

Barcode label Text label

6-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Entering sample information


If you are not using barcodes, the sample ID, rack number, and sample tube position must be specified. Follow
the steps below to enter this information.

Information
The sample ID, rack number and tube position number that are entered in the sampler screen
must be registered in the sample registration list. For the details on sample registration, see
Chapter 5. (➤P.5-3 "Chapter 5: 5.3 Registering a new sample")

1 Touch [Sampler] in the menu screen.


The sampler screen appears.

2 Populate the displayed fields.

[Sample ID.] Enter the sample ID of the sample.


Touch to open the alphanumeric keypad. Up to 15 alphanumeric characters and
hyphens can be entered.
[Rack No.] Enter the rack number.
Touch to open the numeric keypad. A maximum of 6 digits can be entered.
[Tube Pos.] Enter the tube position number.
Touch to open the numeric keypad. The first tube position number on the first
rack can be entered.

6-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.2.5 Operations for stand alone SP-10


Follow the steps below to prepare smears.

1 Confirm that slide glass and single cassettes are in the device.

Note:
Place each slide glass so that the frosted part faces the back of the device.

2 Make sure that the device is in the ready or aspiration ready state.

3 Insert the samples into the racks and place the racks in the right rack pool of
the sampler.
A maximum of 5 racks can be placed.

Caution!
If a sample is left undisturbed for 4 hours or longer and its blood cells and plasma components
have separated, correct results may not be obtained if the sample is not sufficiently mixed. If a
smear is to be made from such a sample, mix thoroughly before placing in the sampler.

6-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

4 Touch [Sampler] in the menu screen.


The screen on the right appears.

5 Touch [Start].
Sample preparation will start.

Caution!
• While the sampler is running, do not touch or remove the CP cover. Risk of injury by the
piercer or other mechanical parts. (If the CP cover is removed, the monitoring switch activates
and sampler operation stops.)
• Do not push the rack to the measurement line during sampler analysis.
• Do not touch the rack on the measurement line during sampler analysis.
• Make sure there is no dirt or other foreign substance on the bottom of the rack. Make sure that
the rack is not damaged or deformed.

Information
If a power failure occurs while the sampler is running, take the following steps.
• Manually remove the tube from the hand clipper.
• Manually remove the racks from the sampler.

Note:
• During smear preparation, the [Start] button changes into the [Stop] button. When the [Stop]
button is touched, smear preparation stops and the [Stop] button changes into the [Continue]
button. When the [Continue] button is touched, smear preparation resumes and the [Continue]
button changes into the [Stop] button.
• An order that does not have a preparation instruction will not be mixed.

6-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.3 Manual smear preparation


In manual smear preparation, a sample is aspirated one at a time from the whole blood aspiration unit, and a smear
is made and then stained. It is also possible to only stain a manually smeared sample. or only print on the slide glass.
To make smears manually, it is necessary to set the operation mode, sample print number, smear level, slide
selection, and the number of slides for each sample.

6.3.1 Opening the manual mode screen


Settings for manual smear preparation are entered in the manual
mode screen.
When [Manual] is touched in the menu screen, the screen on the right
opens.

Information
To start manual smear preparation, the device must be in the aspiration ready state (no slides
remaining on the smear line). In any other state, the [Start] button in the manual mode screen is
grayed out and manual smear preparation cannot be started.

6.3.2 Settings for manual smear preparation


Configure the displayed settings.

[M******-xxxxx] Shows the first line of the default print content.


[Sample ID.] Enter the sample ID of the sample.
Touch to open the alphanumeric keypad. Up to 15 alphanumeric characters and
hyphens can be entered.
[Op mode] Set the desired manual operation mode.
Touch to select [Smr+Sta], [Smear], [Stain], or [Print].

Information
When the operation mode is set to [Smear], it is not possible to select [Smr+Sta] or [Stain] for
manual operation. When the operation mode is set to [Smr+Sta], it is not possible to select
[Smear] for manual operation. See the table below.

6-17
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Operation mode Manual operation mode


settings [Smr+Sta] [Smear] [Stain] [Print]
[Smr+Sta] OK NA OK OK
[Smear] NA OK NA OK

OK: Available, NA: Not available

Depending on the selected operation mode, some settings cannot be configured as shown below.

Operation mode [Smr+Sta] [Smear] [Stain] [Print]


[Sample ID.] OK OK NA OK
[Tube type] OK OK NA NA
[Level] OK OK NA NA
[Slide] OK OK NA OK
[HC Query] OK OK NA OK
[No of slide] OK OK NA OK

OK: Available, NA: Not available

[Tube type] Select the sample tube type.


Touch to set either of the following types:
[Micro] A micro collection sample tube with the cap opened (Open analysis)
[Normal] Regular sample tube (Closed analysis)
[Sarstedt] Sarstedt sample tube (Closed analysis)
[RBT] Raised Bottom Tube (RBT) (Closed analysis)
[Level] Set the level of the smear.
Touch to set one of the following levels:
[Level1] to [Level8] ([Level1] to [Level16] can be set when the host is connected.)
[Slide] Set the slide position.
Touch to select [Either], [Pos. 1], or [Pos. 2].
[HC Query] Set whether host query is used.
Touch to select [use] or [not use].
[No of slide] Set the number of slides to be made for each sample.
Touch to select [1] or [2].

Note:
• When the device is connected to a host computer, the order information can be obtained by
performing a manual sample order inquiry.
• For the details on the smear level, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-40 "Chapter 8: 8.8 Default settings list")

6-18
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.3.3 Starting smear preparation


Start preparing slides based on the set conditions.

Risk of infection
Be sure to wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat when preparing
slides. When finished, wash your hands with a disinfectant. Risk of infection by pathogens.

Information
Smears of closed samples cannot be prepared manually while sampler operation is stopped. If
[Start] is touched, a beep sounds and a warning dialog appears. If you need to manually prepare
smears from closed samples while sampler operation is stopped, manually move the racks to
the right rack pool and put the device in the cancel state.

1 Make sure that the device is in the ready or aspiration ready state.

2 Prepare for slide preparation.


The preparation procedure varies depending on the combination of manual operation and sample tube
selections.
Refer to the preparation procedures described below.

6-19
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Op mode: [Smr+Sta], [Smear]


Smpl Tube: [Micro]
For the details of the recommended tube to use, refer to the following section; (➤P.6-11 "6.2.2 Sample tubes")
Minimum sample volume required: 300 μL
Aspirated sample volume: Approx. 60 μL
Perform open analysis. Remove the cap from the sample tube, open the micro collection sample tube holder
cover, and place the tube in the manual open sample holder.

Information
• Do not place a sample tube other than a micro collection sample tube in the micro collection
sample tube holder. The device may be damaged.
• Always place appropriate adapters when using micro collection sample tubes. If analysis is
performed without placing adapters, the device may be damaged.
• Do not insert a sample tube while [Start] is grayed out.
• When a sample is prepared in micro-sample mode after 2-slide preparation is performed in
closed mode, [Start] will be grayed out for a longer time for the first slide only. (Maximum of 4
minutes.)
• For the analysis procedure using a Raised Bottom Tube, refer to the procedure for closed
analysis.

Note:
Analysis is also possible with the cover of the micro collection sample tube holder open.

6-20
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

OP mode: [Smr+Sta], [Smear]


Smpl Tube: [Normal], [Sarstedt], [RBT]
Recommended sample tubes are the regular sample tubes and Raised
Bottom Tubes described in "6.2.2 Sample tubes".
Perform closed analysis. Mix the sample thoroughly by inverting the tube, put
the sample tube in position 1 on the rack, and place the rack in the right rack
pool of the sampler. Press [Start] in the manual mode screen. The rack is
automatically conveyed to the aspiration position. After the sample is
returned to the rack, remove the rack.
Refer to the table below for the required sample volumes.

Sample tube diameter Raised Bottom


Tube (RBT)
12 mm 15 mm

Required sample volume 0.6 - 5 mL 0.8 - 7 mL 360 - 500 μL

Aspirated sample volume Approx. 200 μL

Caution!
• In manual operation mode, the sample is not mixed automatically. Be sure to mix the sample
before analysis.
• Note that Raised Bottom Tubes cannot be used in standalone sampler analysis of the SP-10
(when an optional sampler is connected).

6-21
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

Op mode: [Stain]
Put the smears in the single cassettes and place them in the front of the cassette supply table.

Note:
• Single cassettes loaded with slides are automatically fed to the staining process until no more
cassettes remain. The feeder will automatically stop when no single cassettes remain or a
single cassette without a slide is fed.
• If there are many single cassettes ahead of the single cassette that you want to stain when
you place it on the cassette supply table, it will take a long time to complete the slide. To
shorten the time, remove as many of the other single cassettes as possible from the cassette
supply table.

OP mode: [Print]
Put the slide glass to be printed on at the bottom of the slide supply cassette.

3 Touch [Start] in the manual mode screen.


Manual operation starts.

Note:
When [Start] is touched, the button changes to [Stop]. When [Stop] is touched, cassette supply
stops and the button changes to [Start]. Touch [Start] again to resume preparation.

6-22
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6.4 Shutdown
Running [Shutdown1] or [Shutdown2] rinses the hydraulic system.
For the details on the rinsing procedure, see Chapter 9.
(➤P.9-2 "Chapter 9: 9.1.1 Performing [Shutdown1]", P.9-19 "Chapter 9: 9.2.2 Performing [Shutdown2]")
Run [Shutdown1] after the day's operation is finished. If the device is run continuously, run [Shutdown1] at least once
every 24 hours.

Caution!
Do not fail to perform cleaning using shutdown. Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for
microscopic examination. Do not use detergents other than CELLCLEAN AUTO for shutdown.

Note:
When 24 hours have elapsed since the device was started, the message [It has been over 24
hour, since power was turned on. Execute shutdown1.] appears.
Shutdown can be performed by manual shutdown, or auto shutdown using CELLCLEAN AUTO.

6.5 Timer mode


If the device is not operated for a set period of time, the pneumatic unit power automatically turns off. To set the timer,
see to Chapter 8. (➤P.8-8 "Chapter 8: 8.3.1 Setting the timer")

When sample preparation and the maintenance sequence are executed, the pneumatic unit is reset.

6-23
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 6 Smear Preparation

6-24
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

Chapter 7 Smear List

The smear list shows information on smears that have already been made and smears that are currently
being made. The information can also be output.
Information on up to 1,000 smears can be stored in the smear list. After the number of smears reaches
1,000, the information of each new smear deletes the information of the oldest smear.

7.1 Smear list screen


To display the [Smear list] screen, touch [SmearList] in the menu screen.
Smear information appears in the [Smear list] screen.
To show items that do not currently appear, touch [←] or [→].
To move the cursor up or down through the list, touch [↑] or [↓].
If [↑] or [↓] is touched when the cursor is at the top or bottom of the list,
the list scrolls.
To move the cursor to the most recent smear information, touch [Last].
Press [Return] to close the [Smear list] screen and return to the menu
screen.
To display the select menu, touch [Select] in the [Smear list] screen.
The screen is not updated while the select menu is displayed. If the select menu is displayed during smear
preparation, the latest smear information may not be applied.

7.1.1 Colors used in the smear list screen


Smears in the [Smear list] screen are displayed in the following colors based on the status of the sample.

Status Text color

Completed smears Black

Smears currently being prepared Blue

Smears which encounter an error during processing Red

7.1.2 Information displayed in the smear list screen


The following information appears in the screen.

Sample type Shows what type of samples are displayed. [All], [Manual], [Sampler], [Err],
[Normal], or [Date] will appear.
Number of samples The number of samples of the selected sample type appear in the format
"number/total".
[Pos] Indicates the index number of the sample marked by the cursor.
[SAMPLE ID] Shows the sample ID number of up to 15 digits.

7-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

[DATE] Shows a date in a color as indicated below. Blank during smear preparation.
The date appears in the set date display format.
Black: Date when the smear was completed.
Red: Date when an error occurred.
[TIME] Shows a time in a color as indicated below. Blank during smear preparation.
Black: Time when the smear was completed.
Red: Time when an error occurred.
[STATE] Shows one of the following smear preparation states.
[Done] The smear has been completed.
[Cancel] Although an order was received from the conveyor system, no order is in the
host computer.
[N/B] Smear preparation was not possible due to insufficient blood volume.
[Ready] When two slides are prepared, the first slide is being prepared and the second
slide is waiting.
[Asp] The sample is being aspirated.
[Smear] In the smear process
[Dry1] The smear is being dried.
[Sta 1] Staining process 1
[Sta 2] Staining process 2
[Rinse] In the rinsing process
[Dry2] Staining, rinsing, and drying are in progress.
[ ] Error sample
An error occurred during smear preparation.
[MODE] Shows the mode of smear preparation.
[M] Manual smear preparation
[S] Sampler smear preparation
[ORDER] Shows one the following smear preparation order types.
[Manual] Preparation by manually input order
[Host] Preparation by host order
[Positive] Prepared because the hematological analysis result was positive.
[Default] The slide will be prepared according to the instrument settings because there is
no order.
[LEVEL] Shows the smear level.
[SLIDE] Shows the slide position.
[Attri] Shows one of the following sample ID attributes.
[B] Read by barcode reader
[A] Automatically assigned
[M] Manually entered
[C] Overwritten by host computer

7-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

[RACK] Shows the number of the rack (000001 to 999999) in which the sample was
placed. Blank in manual preparation mode.
[TUBE] Indicates the number of the tube position where the sample was placed in the
rack. Blank in manual preparation mode.
[REMAIN(min)] Shows the approximate time in minutes remaining for the smear to be
completed.
[PRINT1] Shows the content printed on the slide.
[PRINT2] Shows the content printed on the slide.
[PRINT3] Shows the content printed on the slide.
[SERIAL No] Shows the serial number of the smear.

7.2 Selecting the displayed information


Follow the steps below to specify the information that is shown in the smear list.

1 Touch [Select] in the [Smear list] screen.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [DispSlct].
The screen on the right appears.

[All] Touch to show all sample information.


[Measure] Touch to show only sample information that have been analyzed by the SP-10.
[All] Touch to show all smear information.
[Manual] Touch to show only manual smear information.
[Sampler] Touch to show only sampler smear information.
[Err] Touch to show only information of smears for which an error occurred during
preparation (including samples marked by [*] in the Smear list screen).
[Normal] Touch to show only information of smears for which an error did not occur
during preparation.
[Date] Touch to show only information of smears of the specified date.

7-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

3 Select the type of smear information.


The selected smear information appears in the [Smear list] screen.
The selected type appears under the SP-10 logo.

When [Date] is selected, the screen on the right appears. Touch the
year, month, and day to enter the date using the numeric keypad.
Touch [OK]. Smear information with the specified date appears in the
[Smear list].

7.3 Search
Follow the steps below to search for specified smear information in the smear list.

1 Touch [Last] in the [Smear list] screen.


The cursor moves to the most recent smear information.

2 Touch [Select].
The select menu opens.

3 Touch [Search].
The [Sample search] screen appears.

7-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

4 Set the search conditions.

[Sample ID.] Select this to use the sample ID as a search condition.


To select, touch the button so that a checkmark appears.
[Sample information] Select this to use the printed sample information as a search condition.
To select, touch the button so that a checkmark appears.
Search target entry box Enter the sample ID if [Sample ID.] is selected as a search condition, or enter
the printed text if [Sample information] is selected as a search condition.
Touch the entry box and enter using the alphanumeric keypad.
[Date of slide preparation] Select this to use the slide preparation date as a search condition.
To select, touch the button so that a checkmark appears.
Date of slide preparation This box is active only when the date of slide preparation is selected as a
entry box search condition.
Touch the entry box and enter the date using the numeric keypad dialog.

5 Touch [Search].
The search starts based on the set conditions.
If the specified smear information is found, the cursor moves to the smear information.
If the specified smear information is not found, [Unable to locate corresponding sample.] appears. Press [OK] to
return to the Smear List screen.

Note:
The list is searched from the position of the cursor upward (toward the oldest information). To
search all smear information, touch [Last] in the [Smear list] screen to move the cursor to the
most recent smear information, and then start the search.

7-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

7.4 Output
Follow the steps below to output smear list information to the host computer.

Information
Output is only possible when PC connection is set to [Connect] in the host communication
settings.

1 Move the cursor to the smear information that you want to output.

2 Touch [Select].
The select menu opens.

3 Touch [Output].
The screen on the right appears.

[DispSlct] Touch to output all displayed smear information.


[Highlight] Touch to output the smear information marked by the cursor.
[Cancel] Touch to cancel output.

4 Specify the information that you want to output.


The dialog box on the right appears.

7-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

5 Touch [OK].
The specified smear information is output to the host computer.

7.5 Deleting smear information


Follow the steps below to delete specified smear information from the smear list.

1 Move the cursor to the smear information that you want to delete.

2 Touch [Select].
The select menu opens.

3 Touch [Delete].
The screen on the right appears.

[DispSlct] Touch to delete all displayed smear information.


[Highlight] Touch to delete the smear information marked by the cursor.

4 Select the information that you want to delete.


The dialog box on the right appears.

7-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 7 Smear List

5 Touch [OK].
The selected information is deleted from the list.

7-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Chapter 8 Device Settings

This chapter explains the device settings.

8.1 Entering the password


To use the setting menu, the password must be entered.
Follow the steps below to enter the password.

1 Touch [Settings] in the menu screen.


The [Password input] screen appears.

2 Enter the password.


Enter the password using the alphanumeric keypad.

3 Touch [Entr].
The entry is finalized.
The setting menu selection screen only appears if the password you entered agrees with the previously set
password.
If the password you entered does not match, the password entry screen returns to the password entry ready
state.

Note:
The password is important for the management of the system. Manage the password carefully.
If you forget the password, contact your local Sysmex representative.

8-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.2 Configuring system settings


Follow the steps below to open the system settings.
The system settings allow you to configure settings related to the device system.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [System].
The system settings sub-menu opens.
The following items appear in the system settings sub-menu: [Date], [SerialNo.], [Tube Type], [Password],
[Display] and [Tch Panel].
Refer to the procedures below to set each item.

8.2.1 Setting the date and time


Follow the steps below to change the date and time on the device.

1 Touch [Date] in the system settings sub-menu.


The [Date set] screen appears.

2 Touch each item and set the date and time.

[Format] Set the date format.


Touch to select [yy/mm/dd], [mm/dd/yy], or [dd/mm/yy].
[mm/dd/yy] Set the date.
Touch to open the numeric keypad. Enter the year, month, and day.
[Time] Set the time.
Touch to open the time keypad. Enter the time in 24-hour format.

8-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

Note:
The date can be set to any date between January 1, 2000 to December 31, 2035.

8.2.2 Setting the serial number


Follow the steps below to set the default serial number that is printed on slide glasses.

1 Touch [Serial No.] in the system settings sub-menu.


The [Serial NO. setting] screen appears.

2 Touch [SerialNo].
The numeric keypad appears.

3 Enter the desired default serial number.


Any number from 1 to 99,999 can be entered.

4 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

8-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

5 Touch [Yes].

Note:
The slide glass serial number is reset to the number entered in this setting each time the device
power is turned on.

8.2.3 Setting the sample tube information


Follow the steps below to set the sample tube information.

1 Touch [Tube Type] in the system settings sub-menu.


The screen on the right appears.

2 Touch [TubeType] and set the sample tube information.


Select the sample tube you are using.
[Normal] Regular sample tube
[Sarstedt] Sarstedt sample tube
[RBT] Raised Bottom Tube (RBT)

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

Note:
• The tube type selection sets the appropriate position of piercer for aspiration.
• Refer to the XN-3000 or XN-9000 for tube type setup options available.

8-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.2.4 Setting the password


Follow the steps below to set the password that is entered to open the settings menu screen.

1 Touch [Password] in the system settings sub-menu.


The [Password setting] screen appears.

2 Touch [New Password].


The numeric keypad appears opens.

3 Enter the new password.

4 Touch [Confirmation Password].


The numeric keypad appears.

5 Enter the password again for confirmation.

6 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

7 Touch [Yes].

8-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.2.5 Setting the device environment


Follow the steps below to set the volume, alarms, brightness, and other device environment settings.

1 Touch [Display] in the system setting sub-menu.


The [Display and Sound] screen appears.

2 Touch and set each display and sound item.

[Language]* Set the language that appears in the display.


The following 12 languages are available:
[Japanese] Changes the screen to Japanese.
[English] Changes the screen to English.
[French] Changes the screen to French.
[German] Changes the screen to German.
[Spanish] Changes the screen to Spanish.
[Italian] Changes the screen to Italian.
[Portuguese] Changes the screen to Portuguese.
[Greek] Changes the screen to Greek.
[T Chinese] Changes the screen to traditional Chinese.
[S Chinese] Changes the screen to simplified Chinese.
[Korean] Changes the screen to Korean.
[Brazilian] Changes the screen to Brazilian (Brazilian Portugese).
[Volume] Set the alarm volume. The volume increases in the order [1], [2], [3].
[Alarm] Set the alarm volume type. Available types are as follows:
[Type1], [Type2], [Type3], [Type4], [Type5], [Type6]
To show the remaining selections that do not appear on the screen, touch
[Others>>].
[Alarm test] Touch to listen to the set alarm.
[Brightness] Set the brightness of the LCD screen.
[Bright] or [Dark] can be selected.
* Setting changes are applied after restart.

8-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8.2.6 Calibrating the touch panel


Follow the steps below to calibrate the touch panel.

1 Touch [Tch Panel] in the system settings sub-menu.


The screen on the right appears.

2 Touch the center of the [+] mark.


Perform the above operation a total of 5 times.
When you have finished calibration, the window on the right appears.

8-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

3 Touch [OK].

Note:
If you touch anywhere other than the [+] mark, a touch
panel calibration error occurs and an error dialog appears.
Touch [OK] to return to the calibration screen with the [+]
mark in the same position.

8.3 Device settings


Settings for devices can be configured.
Follow the steps below to open the device settings.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [Device].
The device settings sub-menu opens.
The following items appears in the device settings sub-menu: [Timer], [Sensor], [Fan], [Bar Code] and [Printer].
Refer to the procedures below to set each item.

8.3.1 Setting the timer


Follow the steps below to set the timer.
When the timer is set, the pneumatic unit power will automatically turn off and the device will enter standby
mode if the device is left unused for the set period of time.

1 Touch [Timer] in the device settings sub-menu.


The [Timer set] screen appears.

8-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

2 Touch each item to set the timer.

[Auto-Off Compressor] Set auto-off to [Use] or [Not use].


[Timer] Set the timer time for the pneumatic unit.
Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the time.
Set the time within the range 1 minute to 30 minutes in increments of 1 minute.

Caution!
To maximize the service life of the pneumatic unit, be sure to use the Auto-Off Compressor
function.

Information
When [Auto-Off Compressor] is set to [Not use], a timer time cannot be set.

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings


Follow the steps below to configure settings for the smear sensor, blood sensor, and blood aspiration sensor.

1 Touch [Sensor] in the device settings sub-menu.


The [Sensor setting] screen appears.

2 Touch each item to configure the sensor settings.

[Smear sensor] Set the smear sensor to [Use] or [Not use].


[Blood sensor] Set the blood sensor to [Use] or [Not use].
[Blood asp sensor] Set the blood aspiration sensor to [Use] or [Not use].

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

Note:
The smear sensor checks the slide glass after smearing to monitor smear preparation.
The blood sensor monitors the volume of blood in the sample tube.
The blood aspiration sensor monitors the volume of blood after aspiration.

8-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.3.3 Configuring fan settings


Follow the steps below to configure settings for the smear fan and the printer fan.

1 Touch [Fan] in the device settings sub-menu.


The [Setting drier fan] screen appears.

2 Touch each item to configure the fan settings.

[Smear fan] Change the speed of the smear fan.


Select from [High], [Medium], [Low], [Not Use].
[Printer fan] Set the printer fan to [Use] or [Not use].

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.3.4 ID barcode settings


Follow the steps below to configure how the ID barcode reader is used and the check digit settings.

Note:
ID barcode settings can only be configured when a sampler (optional) is used.

1 Touch [Bar Code] in the device settings sub-menu.


The barcode settings sub-menu opens.

2 Touch each item to set the ID barcode reader and check digit settings.

● Setting the reader


Touch [Rder. Set] to set [ID Reader], [Tube ID], and [Rack ID] to [Use]
or [Not use].

[ID Reader] Set the ID barcode reader to [Use] or [Not use].


[Tube ID] Set sample tube ID (the barcode affixed to sample tubes) to [Use] or [Not use].
[Rack ID] Set rack ID (the barcode affixed to racks) to [Use] or [Not use].

Information
When the ID reader is set to [Not use], the tube ID and rack ID settings cannot be configured. If
configured, the settings are not applied.

8-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

[Read test] can be used to run a reading test of sample tube IDs and
rack IDs.

[Read test] Touch to run the reading test. The results will
appear in the [ID Bar code reader] screen.

Information
Before performing the reading test, insert the sample tube with the affixed sample tube ID into
the rack with the affixed rack ID, and place at the right end of the analysis line.

● Setting the tube ID


The checkbox of each item can be selected to set the sample tube ID
check digit. No checkboxes are selected in the default state.

[ITF] Configure the check digit setting for ITF barcodes.


[MOD-10] or [None] can be selected.
[CODABAR/NW7] Configure the check digit setting for CODABAR/NW7 barcodes.
[MOD-11], [W-MOD-11], [MOD-16], or [None] can be selected.
[CODE39] Configure the check digit setting for CODE39 barcodes.
[MOD-43] or [None] can be selected.
[JAN/EAN/UPC] Configure the check digit setting for JAN barcodes.
When this button is touched, the check digit is set to [MOD-10].
[CODE128] Configure the check digit setting for CODE128 barcodes.
When this button is touched, the check digit is set to [MOD-103].

Warning!
When using barcodes, use a check digit whenever possible. If a check digit is not used, the
potential for incorrect reading of a barcode increases.

8-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Information
If [None] is selected for ITF, CODABAR/NW7, or CODE39, a warning appears that reliability will
decrease. To set [None] anyway, touch [OK] in the warning dialog.

● Setting the rack ID


The checkbox of each item can be selected to set the rack ID check
digit. Only one of the rack IDs can be set. The default setting is
[CODABAR/NW7].

[CODABAR/NW7] Configure the check digit setting for CODABAR/NW7 barcodes.


When this button is touched, the check digit is set to [MOD-16].
[CODE39] Configure the check digit setting for CODE39 barcodes.
When this button is touched, the check digit is set to [MOD-43].

Warning!
When using barcodes, use a check digit whenever possible. If a check digit is not used, the
potential for incorrect reading of a barcode increases.

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.3.5 Configuring printer settings


The information printed on the slide glass can be set.

Configuring the print settings


The items printed on the slide glass can be set.

Warning!
• Make sure there are no fingerprints or other oily substances on the frosted part of slide
glasses. The ink will not transfer and printing will not be possible.
• Make sure there is no dirt or debris on the frosted part of slide glasses. The ink will not transfer
and printing will not be possible.
• Slide glass powder or other fine debris may on rare occasions cause the ink ribbon to tear. If
ribbon damage occurs, check the printed content on the sample before using the sample.
• To obtain the best print and smear quality, it is highly recommended that the laboratory use
Sysmex recommended and testing slides.

Print format
The information that can be printed by the thermal printer can be changed as shown below based on the
combination of font size and format.

Note:
To print at 12 x 24 (dots per character) or 12 x 24 LNG (dots per character), a device setting
must be changed. To have the settings changed, contact your local Sysmex representative.

List of thermal printer print types

Font size setting Print type setting Print content

16 x 32 Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)
Type 2 Text (max. 15 characters) x 1 line
1-dimensional barcode (max. 8 characters)

Type 3 Text (max. 8 characters) x 3 line


2-dimensional barcode (max. 50 characters)

12 x 24 Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)
Type 2 Text (max. 15 characters) x 1 line
1-dimensional barcode (max. 8 characters)

Type 3 Text (max. 8 characters) x 3 line


2-dimensional barcode (max. 50 characters)

8-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Font size setting Print type setting Print content

12 x 24 LNG Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)
Type 2 Text (max. 15 characters) x 2 line
1-dimensional barcode (max. 8 characters)

Type 3 Text (max. 13 characters) x 2 line


Text (max. 15 characters) x 1 line
2-dimensional barcode (max. 20 characters)

16 x 32 Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)

1 Touch [Printer] in the device settings sub-menu.


The [Printer setting] screen appears.

2 Touch [Format].

3 Set the combination of content to be printed on glass slides.


One of following print types can be selected in the selection dialog. A setting screen for the selected print
type appears.

[Type1] Three lines of text data.


[Type2] One or two lines of text data and a barcode.
[Type3] Three lines of text data and a 2-dimensional bar code.

8-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

4 Configure the settings in the printer setting screen of the selected print
type.
● Type 1 print setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character)

[Format] Refer to step 3.


A maximum of 15 characters can be printed on each line.
[1st (text)] Set the item to be printed on the first line of the glass slide.
The following items are available.
[No print], [SAMPLE ID], [Date], [WBC,RBCcnt], [Ord,Smr Lv], [Serial No.],
[Host1], [Host2], [Host3]
[2nd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the second line of the glass slide.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[3rd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the third line of the glass slide.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[Test print] Perform a test print using the current settings.

● Type 1 printer setting screen (12 x 24 LNG dots per character)


Same as the Type 1 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character).

8-17
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

● Type 2 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character)

[Format] Refer to step 3.


[1st (text)] Set the item to be printed on the first line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 15 characters can be printed.
The following items are available.
[No print], [SAMPLE ID], [Date], [WBC,RBCcnt], [Ord,Smr Lv], [Serial No.],
[Host1], [Host2], [Host3]
[2nd (text)] Cannot be selected when the font sizes are 16 x 32 dots per character and 12 x
24 dots per character.
Nothing will be printed on the second line.
[Barcode] Set the item printed by barcode.
The following items are available.
[Serial No.], [SAMPLE ID], [Host1], [Host2], [Host3]
[Bar code type] Set the barcode type to be printed.
The following types are available.
[ITF], [NW7], [CODE39], [CODE128]
When [Serial No.] or [SAMPLE ID] is selected for the print item, printable digits
will be printed in the barcode from the least significant digit. When [Host1],
[Host2], or [Host3] is selected, printable digits will be printed in the barcode
from the most significant digit.
[Check digit] Set the check digit to be appended to the barcode selected in [Bar code type].
The following check digit settings are available.
For [ITF]: [MOD-10], [None]
For [NW7]: [MOD-16], [None]
For [CODE39]: [MOD-43], [None]
For [CODE128]: [MOD-103]

8-18
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Number of printable
Barcode type Check digit Printable characters
digits

Minimum of 2 digits
[MOD-10]
Maximum of 7 digits
[ITF] Numbers (0 to 9)
Minimum of 2 digits
[None]
Maximum of 8 digits

[MOD-16] Numbers (0 to 9)
[NW7] Maximum of 5 digits
[None] Symbols (-, $, ., +)

[MOD-43] Numbers (0 to 9)
[CODE39] Maximum of 4 digits Letters (upper case)
[None] Symbols (-, ., space, $, /, +, %)

[CODE128] [MOD-103] Maximum of 4 digits All characters of ASCII code

If characters that cannot be printed in a barcode are printed, the


specified content will be printed as text instead of as a barcode. A print
data error will occur and aspiration from the next sample will be
stopped. To identify samples on which printing was not possible, check
the smear list.

[Test print] Perform a test print using the current settings.

● Type 2 printer setting screen (12 x 24 LNG dots per character)

[Format] Refer to step 3.


[1st (text)] Set the item to be printed on the first line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 15 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as for the first line of Type 2 printer setting screen
(16 x 32 dots per character).
[2nd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the second line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 15 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[Barcode] Same as the Type 2 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character).
[Bar code type] Same as the Type 2 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character).
[Check digit] Same as the Type 2 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character).
[Test print] Perform a test print using the current settings.

8-19
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

● Type 3 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character)

[Format] Refer to step 3.


[Barcode] Set the item printed by barcode.
In addition to the same items as the first line, [HostBC] (information for a 2-
dimensional barcode received from the host computer) can also be selected.
[Barcode type] Set the type of 2-dimensional barcode to be printed.
The following types are available.
A maximum of 50 characters can be printed in each barcode.
[QR Code]
[DataMatrix]
[1st (text)] Set the item to be printed on the first line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 8 characters can be printed.
The following items are available.
[No print], [SAMPLE ID], [Date], [WBC,RBCcnt], [Ord,Smr Lv], [Serial No.],
[Host1], [Host2], [Host3]
[2nd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the second line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 8 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[3rd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the third line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 8 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[Test print] Perform a test print using the current settings.

8-20
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

● Type 3 printer setting screen (12 x 24 LNG dots per character)

[Format] Refer to step 3.


[Barcode] Set the item printed by barcode.
In addition to the same items as the first line, [HostBC] (information for a 2-
dimensional barcode received from the host computer) can also be selected.
In the case of 12 x 24 LNG dots, the first 20 of the 50 characters of 2-
dimensional barcode data that are received are printed in the barcode.
[Barcode type] Same as the Type 3 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots per character).
[1st (text)] Set the item to be printed on the first line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 13 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as the Type 3 printer setting screen (16 x 32 dots
per character).
[2nd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the second line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 13 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[3rd (text)] Set the item to be printed on the third line of the glass slide.
A maximum of 15 characters can be printed.
Items available are the same as for the first line.
[Test print] Perform a test print using the current settings.

5 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

6 Touch [Yes].

8-21
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Default printing
When all print data is set to be received from the host but data reception fails, the default print data will be
printed.

For Type 1 printing


(16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character, 12 x 24 LNG dots per
character)

[1st (text)] The operation mode, date, and serial number are printed.
[Op mode] [S] for sampler mode or [M] for manual mode is printed.
[Date] 6-digit date information is printed. The date format is the format set in [Date].
[Serial No.] The serial number is printed (maximum of 5 digits).
[2nd (text)] The sample ID is printed.
[3rd (text)] Nothing is printed.

For Type 2 printing


(16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character)

[1st (text)] The operation mode, date, and serial number are printed.
[Op mode] [S] for sampler mode or [M] for manual mode is printed.
[Date] 6-digit date information is printed. The date format is the format set in [Date].
[Serial No.] The serial number is printed (maximum of 5 digits).
[2nd (text)] Nothing is printed.
[Barcode] The sample ID is printed. The number of digits that can be printed varies by
barcode type. If the sample ID exceeds the number of printable digits, the
number of digits of the sample ID that can be printed will be printed from the
least significant digit in the barcode.

For Type 2 printing


(12 x 24 LNG dots per character)

[1st (text)] The operation mode, date, and serial number are printed.
[Op mode] [S] for sampler mode or [M] for manual mode is printed.
[Date] 6-digit date information is printed. The date format is the format set in [Date].
[Serial No.] The serial number is printed (maximum of 5 digits).
[2nd (text)] Nothing is printed.
[Barcode] The sample ID is printed. The number of digits that can be printed varies by
barcode type. If the sample ID exceeds the number of printable digits, the
number of digits of the sample ID that can be printed will be printed from the
least significant digit in the barcode.

8-22
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

For Type 3 printing


(16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character)

[Barcode] The sample ID is printed.


[1st (text)] 6-digit date information is printed. The date format is the format set in [Date].
[2nd (text)] The serial number is printed (maximum of 5 digits).
[3rd (text)] The sample ID is printed. If the sample ID exceeds 9 digits, the least significant
7 digits of the sample ID will be printed with "+" on the left to indicate that only
part of the sample ID was printed.

For Type 3 printing


(12 x 24 LNG dots per character)

[Barcode] The sample ID is printed.


[1st (text)] 6-digit date information is printed. The date format is the format set in [Date].
[2nd (text)] The serial number is printed (maximum of 5 digits).
[3rd (text)] The sample ID is printed (maximum of 15 digits).

8.4 Smear and stain settings


Follow the steps below to open the smear and stain settings.
The smear and stain settings are used to configure settings for the smear and stain process.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [Cond.].
The smear and stain sub-menu opens.
[Mode], [Set stain] and [Set smear] appear in the smear and stain sub-menu.
Refer to the procedures below to set each item.

8.4.1 Setting the operation mode


Follow the steps below to set the operation mode and default slide preparation conditions.

1 Touch [Mode] in the smear and stain sub-menu.


The [Op mode setting] screen appears.

8-23
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

2 Touch each item to configure the operation mode settings.

[Op mode] Set the operation mode.


[Smr+Sta] or [Smear] can be selected.
[No. of Smear] Set the number of slides to be made for each sample.
[1 slide] or [2 slides] can be selected.
[Slide] Set this when using two types of slide glasses.
The following items are available.
[Either] Use either slide glass.
[Pos.1] Use the slide glass from slide supply cassette 1.
[Pos.2] Use the slide glass from slide supply cassette 2.
[Smear Level] Set the level of the smear.
The following levels are available.
[Level1] to [Level8] ([Level1] to [Level16] can be set when the host is connected.)
To show the remaining selections that do not appear on the screen, touch
[Others>>].

Note:
• The operation mode settings are retained even when the power is off. The next time the power
is turned on, the current settings will remain in effect.
• The set smear conditions are shown in a list on the right side of the [Op mode setting] screen.
Touch [↑] or [↓] to change the displayed levels.

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8-24
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.4.2 Setting the smear conditions


Follow the steps below to set parameters for each smear level.

1 Touch [Set smear] in the smear and stain sub-menu.


The screen on the right appears.

2 Touch [↑] or [↓] to move the cursor to the desired level.


Touch [←] or [→] to display items that do not appear on the screen.

3 Touch [Edit].
The [Smear condition] screen for the level selected by the cursor appears.

4 Set the smear conditions.


The [Smear condition] screen consists of two pages.
Touch [<<] or [>>] to change pages.

[HCT] Set the hematocrit value.


Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the
hematocrit value.
Any number from 0 to 100 can be entered.
The lower limit of the Hct value one level up also
changes accordingly.
[SAMPLE Set the volume of blood dispensed for smear
VOLUME] preparation.
[+] increases the value by one pulse.
[-] decreases the value by one pulse.
Any number from 7 to 50 can be entered.
[ANGLE] Set the angle of the spreader glass during
smearing.
[+] increases the angle by 0.1 °.
[-] decreases the angle by 0.1 °.
Any number from 20.0 to 36.0 can be entered.

8-25
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

[SPEED] Set the speed of the spreader glass during


smearing.
[+] increases the speed by 1 mm/sec.
[-] decreases the speed by 1 mm/sec.
Any number from 30 to 185 can be entered.
[STAND BY Set the time before smearing starts after the
TIME] spreader glass touches the blood.
[+] increases the time by 0.1 second.
[-] decreases the time by 0.1 second.
Any number from 0.5 to 3.0 can be entered.
[SMEAR Set the position where spreading by the
START POS.] spreader glass starts.
[+] increases the value by one pulse.
[-] decreases the value by one pulse.
Any number from 0 to 200 can be entered.

5 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

Changing the parameters changes the length and thickness of the blood film. The relations between the
parameters and the length and thickness of the blood film are shown below.

Increase Decrease
Parameters Smear Smear Smear Smear
length thickness length thickness

[SAMPLE VOLUME] Longer Thicker Shorter Thinner

[ANGLE] Shorter Thicker Longer Thinner

[SPEED] Shorter Thicker Longer Thinner

[SMEAR START POS.] Longer Thicker Shorter Thinner

Warning!
Changes made to smear settings may affect dispersion of blood cells. As part of good laboratory
practice, a few test slides should be run through device after changes are made to smear
preparation or staining process.

8-26
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Note:
• To change [ANGLE] in increments of 1 °, touch [+] or [-] for an extended time.
• To change [SPEED] in increments of 20 mm/sec, touch [+] or [-] for an extended time.

6 Touch [Yes].

8.4.3 Setting the stain conditions


Follow the steps below to set or modify the stain conditions.

1 Touch [Set stain] in the smear and stain sub-menu.


The screen on the right appears.

2 Touch [↑] or [↓] to move the cursor to the desired level.

3 Touch [ENABLE].
The profile selected by the cursor will be used for the staining conditions and the display will change to
[ENABLE]. The profile that was previously used will change to [DISABLE].

4 Touch [↑] or [↓] to move the cursor to the profile whose settings you want to
change.

5 Touch [Edit].
The [Set staining] screen for the profile selected by the cursor appears.

8-27
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

6 Set the stain conditions.


The [Set staining] screen consists of six pages.
Touch [<<] or [>>] to change pages.

[Met Reuse] Set the number of times the methanol is reused.


Touch to open the numeric keypad, and enter
the number of times.
Any number from 0 to 20 can be entered.
[Methanol Fix Set the methanol fix time.
time] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.
[Methanol Dry Set the methanol drying time.
time] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.

Note:
• Methanol can be reused multiple times because other fluids almost never mix with it. However,
this depends on the conditions of use. Set a number of times between 0 and 20 as appropriate
for the conditions in your laboratory. If this will not be reused, set to 0.
• If the methanol dry time is set to 11 seconds or longer, the throughput of the device will
decrease. The throughput per hour in this case can be calculated as follows:
Number of samples processed per hour = 3600 / (30 + methanol dry time - 10)

[Stain1 pre- Select [Use] or [Not use] for the stain 1 prefix
fix] process.
[Stain1 Fix Set the fixing time for stain 1.
time] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.
[Stain1 Dry Set the drying time for stain 1.
time] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.

Note:
If the sum of the stain 1 fix time and the stain 1 dry time is 9 seconds or longer, the throughput of
the device will decrease. The throughput per hour in this case can be calculated as follows:
Number of samples processed per hour = 3600 / (30 + fix time + dry time - 8)

8-28
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

[Stain1 Set the number of stain 1 reuse times.


Reuse] Touch to open the numeric keypad, and enter
the number of times.
Any number from 0 to 20 can be entered.
[Stain1 Set the stain 1 staining time.
Staining] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.

Note:
Stain 1 can be reused multiple times because other fluids almost never mix with it. However, this
depends on the conditions of use. Set a number of times between 0 and 20 as appropriate for
the conditions in your laboratory.
If this will not be reused, set to 0.

[Stain1 Select [Use] or [Not use] for stain 1 dilution.


dilution]
[St1 ratio] Set the dilution ratio for stain 1.
[1:5] or [1:10] can be selected.
[Stain1 dil. Set the stain 1 dilution time.
time] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.

[St2 ratio] Set the dilution ratio for stain 2.


Select from [1:9], [1:13], [1:19], or [1:25].
[Stain2 dil. Set the stain 2 dilution time.
time] Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.
[Rinse] Set [Use] or [Not use] to select whether the rinse
solution is used after stain 2 dilution.

8-29
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

[Heater] Select [Use] or [Not use] to select whether the


heater is used for slide drying.
[Dry time] Set the drying time.
Touch to open the time keypad and enter the
time in increments of one second.

7 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

8 Touch [Yes].

8.5 Interface
Follow the steps below to open the interface settings.
The interface settings allow connection to external devices for data output.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [Intface].
The interface settings sub-menu opens.
[Network], [Serial] and [Host Com.] appear on the interface settings sub-menu.
Refer to the procedures below to set each item.

8-30
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.5.1 Configuring network settings


Interface settings to output data to a host computer can be configured.

Setting the device IP address


Follow the steps below to set the IP address of the device for output to a host computer.

1 Touch [Network] in the device settings sub-menu.


The network settings sub-menu opens.

2 Touch [SP-10].
The [Network setting] (device IP address) screen appears.

3 Touch each item to configure the IP address of the device.

[IP Address] Set the IP address of the device.


Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the
IP address.
Any number from 0 to 255 can be entered for
each button.
[Net mask] Set the subnet mask.
Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the
subnet mask.
Any number from 0 to 255 can be entered for
each button.

4 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

8-31
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Setting the host IP address


Follow the steps below to set the IP address of the host for output to a host computer.

1 Touch [Network] in the device settings sub-menu.


The network settings sub-menu opens.

2 Touch [Host].
The [Network setting] (host IP address) screen appears.

3 Touch each item to configure the IP address of the host.

[IP Address] Set the IP address of the host computer.


Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the
IP address.
Any number from 0 to 255 can be entered for
each button.
[Port No.] Set the port number of the host.
Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the
port number.
Any number from 0 to 9,999 can be entered.

4 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

8-32
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Setting the gateway


Follow the steps below to set the gateway.

1 Touch [Network] in the device settings sub-menu.


The network settings sub-menu opens.

2 Touch [Gateway].
The [Network setting] (Gateway setting) screen appears.

3 Touch each item to set the default gateway.

[Default Set the default gateway.


gateway] Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the
IP address.
Any number from 0 to 255 can be entered for
each button.

4 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

8.5.2 Configuring serial communication settings


Follow the steps below to configure settings for serial communication.

1 Touch [Serial] in the interface settings sub-menu.


The [Serial] screen appears.

8-33
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

2 Touch each item to configure the serial communication settings.


The serial settings screen consists of two pages.
Touch [<<] or [>>] to change pages.

[Baud rate] Set the RS-232C baud rate.


Select from [1200], [2400], [4800], [9600],
[19200].
[Interval] Set the interval for transmission to the host
computer.
Select [0], [2], [3], [5], [7], [10], or [15].
[Code] Set the RS-232C data bit length.
[7bits] or [8bits] can be selected.
[Stop bit] Set the RS-232C stop bit length.
[1bit] or [2bits] can be selected.
[Parity bit] Set the RS-232C parity check method.
Select [No], [EVEN], or [ODD].
[Class] Set the transmission protocol.
Select [Class A] or [Class B].
[RTS/CTS] Set RTS/CTS for connection to a host computer
to [Use] or [Not use].

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8.5.3 Configuring host communication settings


Follow the steps below to configure connection settings for host communication.

1 Touch [Host Com.] in the interface settings sub-menu.


The [HC settings] screen appears.

8-34
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

2 Touch each item to configure the host communication settings.


The [HC settings] screen consists of two pages.
Touch [<<] or [>>] to change pages.

[HC Select whether to [Connect] or [Not connect] to a


Connection] host computer.
[Connection Set the connection port.
Port] [Serial] or [Ethernet] can be selected.
[Order Query] Select [OK] or [Cancel] for real-time order query.

Information
[Connection Port] and [Order Query] cannot be set when [HC Connection] is set to [Not
connect].

[Data Format] Select the data format for communication with


the host computer.
[SP-10], [SP-10 ASTM], [SP-1000i], or [SP-
1000iASTM] can be selected.
If the device will connect with the host, consult
your local Sysmex representative.
[Reag. Mgt Select [OK] or [Cancel] for the reagent
Report] management report.

3 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

8-35
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.6 Setting sampler stop conditions


When a specified error condition occurs in the device or in a sample, follow the steps below to have sampler
operation stop.

Note:
ID Read error setting, Rack ID Read error setting, and No Blood error setting are dedicated for
the SP-10 (stand alone).
For setting procedure for when an XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, contact your local Sysmex
representative.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [Sampler].
The sampler settings sub-menu opens.

3 Touch [Stop Cond].


The [Stop condition] screen appears.

4 Touch each item to configure the stop settings.


[ID Read Select [Stop] or [Not stop] to specify whether
error] sampler operation stops when a sample tube
read error occurs.
[Rack ID Read Select [Stop] or [Not stop] to specify whether
error] sampler operation stops when a rack ID read
error occurs.
[No Blood Select [Stop] or [Not stop] to specify whether
error] sampler operation stops when a no blood error
occurs.
[Blood Asp Select [Stop] or [Not stop] to specify whether
error] sampler operation stops when a blood aspiration
error occurs.

8-36
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

5 Touch [Return].
The window on the right appears.

6 Touch [Yes].

8.7 Backup

8.7.1 Backing up setting data


Follow the steps below to back up setting data.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [Backup].
The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [Backup].
The dialog box on the right appears.

8-37
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Note:
If backup data has already been saved, an overwrite
confirmation message will appear in the backup
confirmation dialog.
If [OK] is touched to execute backup, the previous backup
data will be overwritten by the new data.

4 Touch [OK].

8.7.2 Restoring setting data


Follow the steps below to back up setting data.

1 Touch [Select] in the settings menu.


The select menu opens.

2 Touch [Backup].
The screen on the right appears.

8-38
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

3 Touch [Restore].
The dialog box on the right appears.

Note:
If no backup data has been saved, a message indicating
that there is no data will appear in the restore confirmation
dialog.
Touch [OK] to return to the [Backup] screen.

4 Touch [OK].
The current settings are overwritten by the backup data.

5 Switch the main power switch off and then on to restart the device.

Note:
When restarting the device, the error message [Shutdown was not executed correctly.] will
appear; however, there is no problem and the message can be disregarded.

8-39
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8.8 Default settings list


The table below shows the factory default setting for each setting item.

First level Second level Third level Item Default setting

[System] [Date] [Format] [mm/dd/yy]

[Serial No.] [Serial No.] [1]

[Tube Type] [Sample Tube] [Normal]

[Password] [Password] None

[Display] [Language] [English]

[Volume] [3]

[Alarm] [Type1]

[Brightness] [Bright]

[Tch Panel] None None

[Device] [Timer] [Auto-Off Compressor] [Use]

[Timer] [30]

[Sensor] [Smear sensor] [Use]

[Blood sensor] [Use]

[Blood asp sensor] [Use]

[Fan] [Smear fan] [Medium]

[Printer fan] [Use]

[Bar Code] [Rder. Set] [ID Reader] [Not use]

[Tube ID] [Not use]

[Rack ID] [Not use]

[Tube ID] [ITF] [MOD-10]

[CODABAR/NW7] [MOD-11]

[CODE39] [MOD-43]

[JAN/EAN/UPC] [MOD-10]

[CODE128] [MOD-103]

[Rack ID] [CODABAR/NW7] [MOD-16]

[CODE39] [MOD-43]

[Printer] [1st (text)] [Host1]


([Type1] when
[2nd (text)] [Host2]
thermal printer is
connected) [3rd (text)] [Host3]

8-40
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

First level Second level Third level Item Default setting

[Device] [Printer] [1st (text)] [Host1]


([Type2] when
[2nd (text)] [No print]
thermal printer is
connected) [Barcode] [Host2]

[Bar code type] [ITF]

[Check digit] [MOD-10]

[Printer] [Barcode] [HostBC]


([Type3] when
[Barcode type] [QR Code]
thermal printer is
connected) [1st (text)] [Host1]

[2nd (text)] [Host2]

[3rd (text)] [Host3]

[Cond.] [Mode] [Op mode] [Smr+Sta]

[No. of Smear] [1 slide]

[Slide] [Either]

[Smear Level] [Level5]

[Set smear] See table below.

[Set stain] [Profile] [PROFILE 1]

[Met Reuse] [5]

[Methanol Fix time] [00:30]

[Methanol Dry time] [00:05]

[Stain1 pre-fix] [Use]

[Stain1 Fix time] [00:03]

[Stain1 Dry time] [00:05]

[Stain1 Reuse] [5]

[Stain1 Staining] [04:30]

[Stain1 dilution] [Use]

[St1 ratio] [1:10]

[Stain1 dil. time] [04:30]

[St2 ratio] [1:25]

8-41
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

First level Second level Third level Item Default setting

[Cond.] [Set stain] [Stain2 dil. time] [14:30]

[Rinse] [Use]

[Heater] [Use]

[Dry time] [10:00]

[Intface] [Network] [SP-10] [IP Address] [0.0.0.0]

[Net mask] [255.255.255.0]

[Host] [IP Address] [0.0.0.0]

[Port No.] [3000]

[Gateway] [Default gateway] [0.0.0.0]

[Serial] [Baud rate] [2400]

[Interval] [2]

[Code] [7bits]

[Stop bit] [2bits]

[Parity bit] [EVEN]

[Class] [Class A]

[RTS/CTS] [Use]

[Host Com.] [HC Connection] [Not connect]

[Connection Port] [Serial]

[Order Query] [OK]

[Data Format] [SP-10]

[Reag. Mgt Report] [Cancel]

[Sampler] [Stop Cond] [ID Read error] [Stop]

[Rack ID Read error] [Stop]

[No Blood error] [Stop]

[Blood Asp error] [Stop]

8-42
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

Default settings for smear conditions


HCT % SAMPLE STAND BY SMEAR
ANGLE SPEED
LEVEL Lower Upper VOLUME TIME START POS.
(degrees) (mm/sec)
limit limit (pulse) (sec) (pulse)

1 - 20 13 27.0 150 2.0 100

2 20 25 13 27.0 140 2.0 100

3 25 30 13 27.0 130 2.0 100

4 30 35 13 27.0 120 2.0 100

5 35 40 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

6 40 45 13 27.0 100 2.0 100

7 45 50 13 27.0 90 2.0 100

8 50 - 13 27.0 80 2.0 100

9 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

10 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

11 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

12 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

13 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

14 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

15 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

16 13 27.0 110 2.0 100

8-43
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 8 Device Settings

8-44
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and


replacing supply parts

In order to keep the device in optimal condition, periodic maintenance must be performed.
Perform maintenance as indicated below. Record your work on the maintenance checklist.

Daily maintenance and Run [Shutdown1] (clean the hydraulic line) 9-2
inspection Clean spreader glass 9-6
Checking the water level in the trap chamber and discarding the
9-9
water
Clean single cassettes 9-11
Replace the staining solutions in the stain chambers 9-13
Weekly maintenance and Clean staining line 9-15
inspection Run [Shutdown2] (clean the hydraulic line and staining chamber) 9-19
Monthly maintenance and Clean racks, right and left sampler rack pools, and measurement
9-21
inspection line
As-needed maintenance Clean the smear and stain lines 9-21
and inspection Clean smearing line 9-24
Adjust air pressure 9-25
Replace the waste container (if installed) 9-30
Supply Replacement Replace reagents 9-38
Replace hand clipper 9-43
Replace rubber plate No. 39 9-44
Replace fuses 9-45
Replace spreader glass 9-46
Replace ink ribbon 9-49

Note:
For the details on the part names, see Chapter 3.
(➤P.3-1"Chapter 3: Part Names and Functions")

9-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Warning!
• When working with the top cover open, secure it in a position where it is stable. Otherwise, the
cover may fall and injure your head or other part of your body.
• When closing the top cover, release the stopper.
• Fragments of glass may occasionally fall into the device. When inserting your hand into the
device, be alert for fragments of glass.

Note:
The times required for the maintenance sequences are indicated below.
• [Shutdown1]: About 15 minutes
• [Shutdown2]: About 20 minutes
• Smear and stain line cleaning: About 40 minutes
• Stain line cleaning: About 40 minutes

9.1 Daily maintenance

9.1.1 Performing [Shutdown1]


Running [Shutdown1] cleans the hydraulic line.
Run [Shutdown1] after the day's operation is finished. If the device is run continuously, run [Shutdown1] at least
once every 24 hours.

Caution!
Do not fail to perform cleaning using shutdown. Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for
microscopic examination.
Do not use detergents other than CELLCLEAN AUTO for shutdown.

Note:
When 24 hours have elapsed since the device was started, the message [It has been over 24
hour, since power was turned on. Execute shutdown1.] appears.
Shutdown can be performed by manual shutdown, or auto shutdown using CELLCLEAN AUTO.

9-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.1.1.1 Manual Shutdown

1 Verify the following:


• There are at least 12 single cassettes on the cassette supply table.
• There is at least 450 mL of methanol in the methanol bottle.

2 Touch [Shutdown] in the menu screen.


The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [Shutdown1 (Daily)].


The screen on the right appears.

9-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

4 Place CELLCLEAN AUTO in position 10 of a rack and place this rack in


front of the hand clipper of the aspiration unit.

5 Touch [OK].
The shutdown starts.
While shutdown is executed, the screen on the right appears.
When the shutdown ends, the device power automatically turns
off.

9-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.1.1.2 Auto Shutdown using CELLCLEAN AUTO

Information
When the ID reader setting is "not used", Auto Shutdown using CELLCLEAN AUTO cannot be
executed.

1 Verify the following:


• There are at least 12 single cassettes on the cassette supply table.
• There is at least 450 mL of methanol in the methanol bottle.

2 Place CELLCLEAN AUTO in position 10 of a rack and place this rack in the
right rack pool of the sampler.

Information
When placing sample tubes in the rack, position the sample tubes so that all barcodes are
visible through the slits in the rack.

9-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

3 Touch [Sampler] in the menu screen.

4 Touch [Start].
The shutdown starts.
While shutdown is executed, the screen on the right appears.
When the shutdown ends, the device power automatically turns
off.

9.1.2 Cleaning the spreader glass


The spreader glass should be cleaned once every 24 hours. Replace when smear quality does not improve
(even after cleaning) or glass is damaged or cracked upon visual inspection. (➤P.9-46 "9.6.5 Replacing the
spreader glass")

Risk of infection
When cleaning the spreader glass, always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear,
and a lab coat. After finishing work, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens if there is blood contamination.

Warning!
CELLCLEAN is a strong alkaline detergent. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothing. In case
of contact, flush with copious amounts of water.
Risk of eye and skin injury and damage to clothing.

Information
Do not use detergents other than CELLCLEAN. The spreader glass is resistant to corrosion by
CELLCLEAN, but other device parts are not. To prevent problems, thoroughly wipe off any parts
that come in contact with CELLCLEAN.

9-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Spreader glass].


The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [OK].
The smear unit moves to the front. While the smear unit moves, the
screen on the right appears.

4 When you are prompted to replace the spreader glass, open the top cover.

Warning!
When working with the top cover open, secure it in a position where it is stable. Otherwise, the
cover may fall and injure your head or other part of your body.

9-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

5 Clean the surface of the spreader glass with gauze moistened with ion-
exchanged water (or purified water).

Surface of spreader glass


(Clean by moving the moistened
gauze in one direction only.)

Caution!
If CELLCLEAN is used to clean the spreader glass, use gauze moistened with ion-exchanged
water when finished to rinse off the CELLCLEAN.

Note:
• CELLCLEAN can be used together with ion-exchanged water (or purified water) to easily
remove foreign matter and dirt.
• When cleaning the spreader glass, the spreader glass holder may move horizontally or
vertically. This is not a problem, and you can clean the spreader glass in the position that you
find easiest.

6 Close the top cover and touch [OK].


The smear unit returns to its home position. While the smear unit
moves, a message indicating that it is moving appears.
When the smear unit reaches its home position, the screen on the
right appears.
When closing the top cover, release the stopper.

9-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

7 Touch [Cancel].
The spreader glass counter is not reset, and the screen returns to the main maintenance screen.

Information
Do not reset the spreader glass counter after cleaning the spreader glass. If the counter is reset,
the spreader glass replacement message will appear at the wrong time.

9.1.3 Checking the water level in the trap chamber and discarding
the water
When the day's work is finished, check the water level in the trap chamber. If water has collected, follow the
steps below to discard it.

Risk of infection
When discarding trap chamber water, always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective
eyewear, and a lab coat. When finished, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens if there is blood contamination.

Caution!
If water collects every day, there may be a problem in the device.
Contact your local Sysmex representative.

1 Shut down the device and wait for one minute.

Warning!
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before performing the work.
Risk of electrical shock.

9-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

2 Remove the trap chamber from the right side of the device by unscrewing it in
the direction of the arrow.

Trap chamber

Loosen

Float

3 Discard the water that has collected in the trap chamber.

4 Replace the trap chamber by screwing it in in the direction of the arrow.

Trap chamber

Tighten

9-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.1.4 Cleaning the single cassettes


Clean single cassettes once a day. Methanol, ethanol, or warm water can be used for the rinsing solution.
Warm water is not as effective for removing dirt as the other rinsing solutions. If warm water is used, clean the
cassettes with methanol or ethanol once a week, or when dirt becomes noticeable.

Warning!
• When cleaning cassettes, be sure to wear adequate personal protective equipment, such as
protective gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat.
If it gets in the eye, rinse with large amounts of water, and seek immediate medical attention.
• Before using a rinsing solution, always read the Safety Data Sheet and work according to the
instructions.
• To avoid inhaling an excessive amount of the vapor when using an organic solvent (methanol
or ethanol) for the rinsing solution, use as small an amount of solvent as possible, and work in
a well-ventilated location.
If you start to feel unwell, take a break and rest quietly in a location with good ventilation.
• When using ion-exchanged water (purified water) for rinsing, heat to no more than 45°C to
prevent scalding.

1 Place the single cassette in the cleaning container.


Obtain a suitable container for cleaning. Select a container made of a material that is resistant to the rinsing
solution to be used (glass, stainless steel, fluororesin, etc.).

2 Fill the container with rinsing solution.


Pour in enough rinsing solution to immerse the single cassette.

Warning!
Do not pour hot water that is 50°C or higher directly onto a single cassette.
Risk of deformation and deterioration of the cassette.

3 Clean the single cassette in the container.


Clean by stirring the solution around gently with your hands (wearing gloves).

9-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

4 Drain the solution from the cassette, and dry completely.


Before using the single cassette, make sure that the cassette is completely dry.

Caution!
• Allow a single cassette to dry completely before use.
If any ion-exchanged water (purified water) remains inside the single cassette, hemolysis may
occur in the smeared sample and prevent accurate microscopy.
• If warm air flow is used to dry the single cassette, set the temperature to no more than 50°C.
Risk of cassette deformation if the temperature is too high.

Information
• Allow a single cassette to dry completely before use.
Risk of interference when conveying if the cassette is not completely dry.
• When using ethanol, effective cleaning is possible even if the ethanol is diluted to 70% with
ion-exchanged water (purified water).
• Do not let a single cassette soak in the rinsing solution for a prolonged time (30 minutes or
longer).
Risk of deformation and deterioration of the cassette.
• When a single cassette is used for a prolonged time, rust may form on the metal parts;
however, this will not affect instrument functionality.
• Rust formation can be reduced by using methanol or ethanol for the rinsing solution,
shortening the soaking time, and drying the cassette immediately after cleaning it.

9-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.1.5 Replacing the staining solutions in the stain chambers


Due to bacteria growth and other reasons, the staining solution cannot be left in the stain chamber over 48
hours. The device will automatically add or replace the staining solutions in the situations indicated below.
However, if none of these situations occur within 48 hours, follow the steps below to replace stains 1 and 2.
• [Shutdown2] is performed (stains 1 and 2 are replaced with methanol, and the stain chambers are refilled with
stains 1 and 2 from external containers the next time the device is started up.)
• Stain 1 is replaced when the number of samples stained by stain 1 exceeds the set number multiplied by 10.
• Stain 2 is replenished after about 110 samples are stained.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Reagent replace].


The reagent registration selection screen appears.

3 Select a reagent with [↑] or [↓] and touch [Regist].


The screen on the right appears.
When reagent information registration is completed, touch [Return].
To replace reagent, go to step 4.

[Lot No.] Set the lot number of the reagent.


Touch to open the alphanumeric keypad. A maximum of 8 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
[Expiry date] Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the expiration date of the reagent.
The entry format is the format set in [Date].
[After opened] Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter a number from 0 to 99.
[No Exp. Msg] / [Exp. Msg] Set [Exp. Msg] or [No Exp. Msg] to specify whether the expiration date of the
reagent is monitored.
[Amounts] Touch to open the numeric keypad. Numbers and a decimal point can be entered.
Enter a value from 0 to 99.9.
[Exchange] Touch to display the reagent replacement screen.

9-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Note:
• The reagent information of methanol cannot be registered. Only replacement is possible.
• To register reagent information with the hand-held barcode reader, open the Reagent Registration
screen and scan the EAN-128 barcode that is affixed to the outer case of the reagent.

4 Touch [Exchange].
The screen on the right appears.
For the details of the reagent replacement procedure, refer to the
following section:
(➤P.9-38 "9.6.1 Replacing a reagent")

5 Touch [OK].
Reagent replacement starts.

9-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.2 Weekly maintenance

9.2.1 Cleaning the staining line


If [Shutdown2] is not performed, follow the steps below to clean the staining line once a week.
When staining line cleaning is performed, the hydraulic system through which the staining solutions run is
automatically cleaned and the staining solutions are replaced.

Reagent volumes used to clean the staining line


Double staining
(When phosphate buffer is used for rinsing after staining with stain 1)
Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

Stain 1 Approx. 220 mL Approx. 221 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 83 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 186 mL Approx. 192 mL

Rinse water Approx. 56 mL

Methanol Approx. 445 mL

Double staining
(When rinse water is used for rinsing after staining with stain 1)
Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

Stain 1 Approx. 220 mL Approx. 221 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 83 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 180 mL Approx. 186 mL

Rinse water Approx. 62 mL

Methanol Approx. 445 mL

Single staining
Reagent name Reagent volume

Stain 1 Approx. 221 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 75 mL

Rinse water Approx. 114 mL

Methanol Approx. 315 mL

9-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

When methanol prefix is performed


Double staining
(When phosphate buffer is used for rinsing after staining with stain 1)
Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

Stain 1 Approx. 220 mL Approx. 221 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 83 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 186 mL Approx. 192 mL

Rinse water Approx. 56 mL

Methanol Approx. 524 mL

Double staining
(When rinse water is used for rinsing after staining with stain 1)
Reagent name Stain 1 (without dilution) Stain 1 (with dilution)

Stain 1 Approx. 220 mL Approx. 221 mL

Stain 2 Approx. 83 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 180 mL Approx. 186 mL

Rinse water Approx. 62 mL

Methanol Approx. 524 mL

Single staining
Reagent name Reagent volume

Stain 1 Approx. 205 mL

Phosphate buffer Approx. 75 mL

Rinse water Approx. 114 mL

Methanol Approx. 339 mL

1 Verify that there is a minimum of 800 mL of methanol in the methanol


container connected to the device.

2 Make sure that the containers for stain 1 and 2 have sufficient amounts of
stain solution.

9-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

3 Place the single cassettes on the single cassette supply table.


The cleaning process will use 17 single cassettes.

Information
When placing the sample cassette, place so that the cut-out at the bottom of the cassette is
away from you.
If the cassette is in the wrong orientation, correct operation will not be possible.
Single
cassette

4 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

5 Touch [Rinse].
The screen on the right appears.

9-17
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

6 Touch [Stain line].


The screen on the right appears.

7 Touch [OK].
Cleaning of the stain line starts.
While cleaning is in progress, the screen on the right appears.
When cleaning is finished, the stain line cleaning screen reappears.

Caution!
Thoroughly clean the single cassettes that were used. For the cleaning procedure, refer to the
following section:
(➤P.9-11 "Chapter 9: 9.1.4 Cleaning the single cassettes")
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.

Information
Once [OK] is touched, it is not possible to stop operation.

9-18
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.2.2 Performing [Shutdown2]


Perform [Shutdown2] to clean the hydraulic line and stain chambers. Shutdown 2 ends with the stain chambers
filled with methanol. The chambers will be filled with the staining solutions the next time the power is turned on.
Follow the steps below to perform [Shutdown2] once a week.

Caution!
Do not fail to perform cleaning using shutdown. Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for
microscopic examination.
Do not use detergents other than CELLCLEAN AUTO for shutdown.

Note:
When one week elapses after [Shutdown2] is last performed, the message [Execute shutdown 2]
appears before the device returns to the ready state.

1 Verify the following:


• There are at least 9 single cassettes on the single cassette supply table.
• There is at least 800 mL of methanol in the methanol container.

9-19
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

2 Touch [Shutdown] in the main screen.


The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [Shutdown2 (Weekly)].


The screen on the right appears.

4 Place CELLCLEAN AUTO in position 10 of a rack and place this rack in front of
the hand clipper of the aspiration unit.

5 Touch [OK].
The shutdown starts.
While shutdown is executed, the screen on the right appears.
When the shutdown ends, the device power automatically turns off.

9-20
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Information
Before turning on the power the next time, make sure that the stain solution containers contain
sufficient amounts of stains 1 and 2.

9.3 Monthly maintenance


If the right or left pool of the sampler, the measurement line, or racks are dirty, wipe clean with a damp cloth.

9.4 As-needed maintenance

9.4.1 Cleaning the smearing and staining line


Follow the steps below to clean the smearing and staining line.

1 Verify that there is a minimum of 800 mL of methanol in the methanol


container connected to the device.

2 Make sure that the containers for stain 1 and 2 have sufficient amounts of
stain solution.

9-21
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

3 Verify that there are a minimum of 17 single cassettes on the single cassette
supply table.

Information
When placing the sample cassette, place so that the cut-out at the bottom of the cassette is
away from you.
If the cassette is in the wrong orientation, correct operation will not be possible.
Single
cassette

4 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

5 Touch [Rinse].
The screen on the right appears.

9-22
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

6 Touch [Whole line].


The screen on the right appears.

7 Place CELLCLEAN AUTO in position 10 of a rack and place this rack in front of
the hand clipper of the aspiration unit.

8 Touch [OK].
Cleaning of the smearing and staining line starts.
While cleaning is in progress, the screen on the right appears.
When finished, the [Smear + Staining line] screen reappears.

Caution!
Clean the single cassettes as recommended. For the cleaning procedure, refer to the following section:
(➤P.9-11 "Chapter 9: 9.1.4 Cleaning the single cassettes")
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.

Information
Once [OK] is touched, it is not possible to stop operation.

9-23
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.4.2 Cleaning the smearing line


If an error such as [Waste chamber1 not draining] occurs, indicating that the waste chamber may be dirty, follow
the steps below to clean the smearing line. When smearing line cleaning is performed, waste chamber 1 is
automatically cleaned together with the hydraulic line through which waste fluid flows.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Rinse].
The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [Smear line].


The screen on the right appears.

4 Place CELLCLEAN AUTO in position 10 of a rack and place this rack in front of
the hand clipper of the aspiration unit.

9-24
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

5 Touch [OK].
Cleaning of the smearing line starts.
While cleaning is in progress, the screen on the right appears.
When finished, the [Smear line] screen reappears.

Information
Once [OK] is touched, it is not possible to stop operation.

9.4.3 Adjusting the air pressure


The pressure and vacuum supplied from the pneumatic unit are adjusted 0.25 MPa, 0.05 MPa and -0.053 MPa
in the pneumatic unit and in the SP-10. These pressures are monitored by pressure sensors, and an error
message will appear if there is any abnormality.
If an error message indicating an abnormal pressure is displayed, check if there is any leakage from the tube
connections. If everything appears to be normal, display the pressure readings in the pressure/temperature/
humidity status display screen and adjust each pressure.

Note:
For the details on pressure/temperature/humidity status display screen, see Chapter 3.
(➤P.3-16 "Chapter 3: 3.7 Status display")

Adjusting the pressure to 0.25 MPa


This pressure is used to drive the air cylinders and master valves.
Follow the steps below to adjust the pressure.

1 Touch [Status] in the menu screen.

9-25
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

2 Touch [<<] or [>>] to display the pressure/temperature/humidity status


display screen.

3 Loosen the fixing screw for the 0.25 MPa regulator on the pneumatic unit.
Fixing screw
Loosen

4 While viewing the pressure display in the pressure/temperature/humidity


status display screen, adjust the pressure by turning the adjustment knob.
To increase the pressure, turn the adjustment knob clockwise.
Adjustment range: 0.25 ± 0.01 MPa

Low

High

Adjustment
knob

Information
Always adjust the pressure to the required level by increasing the pressure. If the pressure is too
high, lower it below the required level and then increase it to the required level.

5 Make sure that the pressure displayed in the pressure/temperature/


humidity status display screen is at the required level.
If not at the required level, repeat steps 3 and 4.

9-26
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

6 Tighten the fixing screw, being careful that the adjustment knob does not
rotate.
Fixing screw

Tighten

Adjusting the pressure to 0.05 MPa


This pressure is used to discharge waste fluid.
Follow the steps below to adjust the pressure.

1 Touch [Status] in the menu screen.

2 Touch [<<] or [>>] to display the pressure/temperature/humidity status


display screen.

3 Pull out the 0.05 MPa regulator knob to release the lock.

4 While viewing the pressure display in the pressure/temperature/humidity


status display screen, adjust the pressure by turning the adjustment knob.
To increase the pressure, turn the knob clockwise.
Low High
Adjustment range: 0.05 ± 0.001 MPa

Adjustment
knob

9-27
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Information
Always adjust the pressure to the required level by increasing the pressure. If the pressure is too
high, lower it below the required level and then increase it to the required level.

5 Make sure that the pressure displayed in the pressure/temperature/


humidity status display screen is at the required level.
If not at the required level, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6 Push in the 0.05 Mpa regulator adjustment knob to lock it.

Pneumatic unit vacuum


The vacuum pressure of the pneumatic unit cannot be adjusted. If the vacuum pressure shown in the pressure/
temperature/humidity status display screen is less than -0.05 MPa, take the following steps.

1 Check if the tubing between the main unit and the pneumatic unit or the
tubing inside the pneumatic unit has become disconnected
If disconnected, reconnect the tubing.
If the tubing has not become disconnected, contact your local Sysmex representative.

Note:
Prolonged use will cause the vacuum to gradually decrease. When this occurs, the vacuum
pump may need to be repaired or replaced. Contact your local Sysmex representative.

9-28
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Adjusting the vacuum pressure to -0.053 MPa


This vacuum pressure is used to move fluids between the chambers.
Follow the steps below to adjust the pressure.

1 Touch [Status] in the menu screen.

2 Touch [<<] or [>>] to display the pressure/temperature/humidity status


display screen.

3 Loosen the bellows adjuster locking nut.

4 While viewing the pressure display in the pressure/temperature/humidity


status display screen, adjust the pressure by turning the adjustment knob.
To increase the pressure, turn the knob clockwise.
Adjustment range: -0.053 ± 0.001 MPa
Adjustment
knob

Locking nut

Low High

Information
Always adjust the pressure to the required level by increasing the pressure. If the pressure is too
high, lower it below the required level and then increase it to the required level.

9-29
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

5 Make sure that the pressure displayed in the pressure/temperature/


humidity status display screen is at the required level.
If not at the required level, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6 Tighten the locking nut, being careful that the adjustment knob does not
rotate.

9.4.4 Replacing the waste container (if installed)

Risk of infection
When replacing the waste container, always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear,
and a lab coat. When finished, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens if there is blood contamination.

When the waste fluid monitoring sensor (optional) is installed


When [Waste bottle1 full] or [Waste bottle2 full] appears, follow the steps below to replace the waste container.

1 Wait until [OK] becomes active in the action message.

Warning!
When [OK] becomes active in the action message, start work. Waste fluid may scatter, creating
a risk of infection by pathogens.

2 Prepare an empty waste container and remove the cap.

9-30
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

3 Remove the cap from the full waste container, and pull the cap straight up
keeping the tube connected.

Loosen Loosen

4 Insert the cap with the tube connected into the new waste container and
tighten the cap.

Tighten Tighten

5 Touch [OK] in the action message.

9-31
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.5 Reagent registration function

9.5.1 Reagent registration selection screen


When [Reagent replace] is touched in the main maintenance screen,
the screen on the right appears.
The reagent registration selection screen shows reagent registration
information.
A reagent can be selected with [↑] or [↓], and can be registered.

[Reagent] Shows the reagent type.


Types that can be registered are [Stain1], [Stain2], [DCL], [Buffer], and [Water].
[Date] Shows the date when the reagent was replaced.
[Lot No.] Shows the lot number of the reagent.
[Exp. Date] Shows the expiration date of the reagent.
[Regist] Touch to display the reagent registration screen.

Note:
• If the expiration date is set to [No Exp. Msg] in the reagent registration screen, nothing will
appear in [Exp. Date] in the reagent registration selection screen.
• If connected to the RU, nothing appears in [Lot No.] and [Exp. Date] in the DCL line of the
reagent registration selection screen.

9-32
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.5.2 Registering and replacing reagent (excluding CELLPACK DCL)


Follow the steps below to register a reagent.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Reagent replace].


The reagent registration selection screen appears.

3 Select a reagent with [↑] or [↓] and touch [Regist].


The screen on the right appears.
When reagent information registration is completed, touch [Return].
To replace reagent, go to step 4.

[Lot No.] Set the lot number of the reagent.


Touch to open the alphanumeric keypad. A maximum of 8 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
[Expiry date] Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter the expiration date of the reagent.
The entry format is the format set in [Date].
[After opened] Touch to open the numeric keypad and enter a number from 0 to 99.
[No Exp. Msg] / [Exp. Msg] Set [Exp. Msg] or [No Exp. Msg] to specify whether the expiration date of the
reagent is monitored.
[Amounts] Touch to open the numeric keypad. Numbers and a decimal point can be
entered.
Enter a value from 0 to 99.9.
[Exchange] Touch to display the reagent replacement screen.

Note:
• The reagent information of methanol cannot be registered. Only replacement is possible.
• To register reagent information with the hand-held barcode reader, open the Reagent
Registration screen and scan the EAN-128 barcode that is affixed to the outer case of the
reagent.

9-33
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

4 Touch [Exchange].
The screen on the right appears.
For the details of the reagent replacement procedure, refer to the
following section:
(➤P.9-38 "9.6.1 Replacing a reagent")

5 Touch [OK].
Reagent replacement starts.

9.5.3 Registering and replacing reagent (CELLPACK DCL)


Follow the steps below to register a reagent.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Reagent replace].


The reagent registration selection screen appears.

3 Select a [DCL] with [↑] or [↓] and touch [Regist].


The screen on the right appears.

[Lot No.] The lot number of the reagent is displayed.


[Serial No.] The serial number of the reagent is displayed.
[ReplaceDate] The exchange date of the reagent is displayed.

9-34
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

[Exp. Date] The reagent expiry date is displayed.


[After opened] The reagent expiry date after opened is displayed.
[Amounts] The reagent amount is displayed.
[Entry Type] The reagent code entry method appears.
[Manual] If not using the hand-held barcode reader, touch [Manual] to display the reagent
code entry screen and manually enter the reagent code.
[Exchange] Touch to display the reagent replacement screen.

Note:
When the RU is connected, DCL reagent information cannot be registered. Only replacement is
possible.

4 Enter the Reagent Code.


If you are using a hand-held barcode reader, scan the Reagent
Code (barcode) on the outer box of the new reagent.
Reagent Code is as shown the right illustration.

If you are not using a hand-held barcode reader, touch [Manual] to display the Reagent Code screen and enter
the Reagent Code manually.
For the details of the manual entry, refer to the following section;
(➤P.9-36 "9.5.4 Entering the Reagent Code manually")

If the Reagent Code is read or entered, the reagent information is displayed automatically and [Exchange]
becomes enabled.
After registering the reagent information, proceed to the step 5 and replace the reagent.

5 Touch [Exchange].
The screen on the right appears.
For the details of the reagent replacement procedure, refer to the
following section:
(➤P.9-38 "9.6.1 Replacing a reagent")

9-35
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

6 Touch [OK].
Reagent replacement starts.
After replacing the CELLPACK DCL, the reagent information is registered.
If [Return] is touched without replacing the reagent, the reagent information is not registered.

9.5.4 Entering the Reagent Code manually


Follow the steps below to enter the Reagent Code.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Reagent replace].


The reagent registration selection screen appears.

3 Select a [DCL] with [↑] or [↓] and touch [Regist].


The screen on the right appears.

4 Touch [Manual].
The screen on the right appears.

9-36
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

5 Enter the Reagent Code.


Enter the reagent code blocks as follows: 6 digits → 6 digits → 6 digits
→ 6 digits → 4 digits. When each of the buttons is touched, an
alphanumeric keypad appears to let you enter alphanumeric
characters.

6 Touch [OK].
The screen returns to the reagent information registration screen.
If the entered reagent code is not correct, a re-entry confirmation dialog will appear.
Touch [OK] and enter the correct reagent code.

9.5.5 Viewing the reagent replacement history


Follow the steps below to view the reagent replacement history.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [History].
The history selection screen appears.

3 Touch [Reagent history].


The screen on the right appears.
If 6 or more entries are stored, press [↑] or [↓] to change pages.

[Detail] Touch to show the details of the selected entry.

9-37
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.6 Replacing supply parts

9.6.1 Replacing a reagent


If a reagent runs low during analysis, one of the messages below will appear on the screen. Replace or
replenish the indicated reagent.

Reagent to be replaced or
Error message
replenished

[DCL not filled] CELLPACK DCL*

[Stain1 not filled in chamber1] Stain 1

[Stain1 not filled in chamber2] Stain 1

[Stain2 not filled] Stain 2

[Rinse water not filled] Ion-exchanged water

[Methanol not filled in chamber1.] Methanol

[Methanol not filled in chamber2.] Methanol

[Replace rinse water] Ion-exchanged water

[Replace buffer] Phosphate buffer

* If connected to the RU, reagent is not supplied from the RU.


Check the RU.

Replacing CELLPACK DCL, Stain 1, and Stain 2

Follow the steps below to replace a reagent.

1 Prepare the new reagent and confirm that its expiration date has not
passed.

Caution!
• Leave the reagent at room temperature (5 - 30°C) for at least 24 hours before use.
• When handling a reagent that may have frozen, follow the precautions given on the package.
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.
• When replacing the reagent container, make sure there is no dust or other contaminants on
the intake tube.
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.
• After opening the reagent, take care to prevent contamination by dirt, dust, and bacteria.
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.

9-38
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

2 Remove the cap from the new reagent container.

3 Remove the cap from the empty reagent container, and pull the intake tube
straight up.
Intake tube
Intake tube

Reagent container Reagent container

4 Insert the intake tube into the new reagent container and tighten the cap.
To replace CELLPACK DCL when not connected to the RU, go to step 5.
If connected to the RU, make sure that reagent is supplied from the RU and go to step 7.
To replace dye solution 1 or dye solution 2, go to step 7.

Caution!
• Take care not to touch the tube that goes into the reagent and make sure there is no dust or
other foreign matter on the tube. If there is dust or other foreign matter on the tube, rinse it off
with reagent before inserting the tube. Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for
microscopic examination.
• Take care not to spill the reagent. If reagent is spilled, wipe it up immediately with a damp
cloth.
Spilled reagent may cause discoloration of the surface on which it spills.

5 Touch [Regist] in the action message.


The screen on the right appears.
When reagent information registration is completed, touch
[Return].
The screen returns to the action message.

[Reag.] The reagent name is displayed.


[Lot No.] The lot number of the reagent is displayed.

9-39
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

[Serial No.] The serial number of the reagent is displayed.


[ReplaceDate] The exchange date of the reagent is displayed.
[Exp. Date] The reagent expiry date is displayed.
[Expiry date after opened] The reagent expiry date after opened is displayed.
[Amounts] The reagent amount is displayed.
[Entry Type] The reagent code entry method appears.
[Manual] If not using the hand-held barcode reader, touch [Manual] to display the reagent
code entry screen and manually enter the reagent code.

Note:
When the RU is connected, DCL reagent information cannot be registered. Only replacement is
possible.

6 Enter the Reagent Code.


If you are using a hand-held barcode reader, scan the
Reagent Code (barcode) on the outer box of the new reagent.
Reagent Code is as shown the right illustration.

If you are not using a hand-held barcode reader, touch [Manual] to display the Reagent Code screen and
enter the Reagent Code manually.
For the details of the manual entry, refer to the following section;
(➤P.9-36 "9.5.4 Entering the Reagent Code manually")

If the Reagent Code is read or entered, the reagent information is displayed automatically and [Exchange]
becomes enabled.
When reagent information registration is completed, touch [Return].
The screen returns to the action message.

7 Touch [OK] in the action message.


The new reagent is aspirated and the reagent is replaced.
For the details on action messages, see Chapter 10.
(➤P.10-2 "Chapter 10: 10.3 Action messages")

9-40
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

Replenishing the phosphoric acid buffer


If [Replace buffer] appears, follow the steps below to replenish the buffer (phosphoric acid buffer).

1 Remove the cap from the container.

Caution!
When replenishing the phosphoric acid buffer, do not remove the float switch.
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.

2 Fill the container with phosphoric acid buffer.


The container holds about 20 L.

Phosphoric
acid buffer

Note:
When SP-Buffer is used, refilling of the container is not needed.

3 Cap the container.

Replenishing rinse water


If [Replace rinse water] appears, follow the steps below to replenish the rinse water (ion-exchanged water).

1 Remove the cap from the container.

Caution!
When replenishing rinse water, do not remove the float switch.
Otherwise, smear quality may not be suitable for microscopic examination.

9-41
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

2 Fill the container with rinse water (ion-exchanged water).


The container holds about 20 L.

Rinse water

Note:
When SP-Rinse is used, refilling of the container is not needed.

3 Cap the container.

Replenishing the methanol


If [Methanol not filled in chamber1.] or [Methanol not filled in chamber2.] appears, follow the steps below to
replenish the methanol.

Warning!
Methanol is flammable at room temperature. Handle with the utmost caution.

1 Remove the cap from the container.

2 Fill the container with methanol.


The container holds about 5 L.
Methanol

3 Cap the container.

9-42
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.6.2 Replacing the hand clippers


If the hand clippers are deformed and no longer able to hold sample tubes, follow the steps below to replace
them.

Risk of infection
When replacing the hand clippers, always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear,
and a lab coat. When finished, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens if there is blood contamination.

1 Run shutdown to shut down the device, and switch off the main power switch.

Warning!
Switch off the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before
performing the work.
Risk of electrical shock.

2 Open the CP cover.

3 Remove the hand clipper fixing screws (2 each for piercing and for mixing),
and remove the hand clippers.
Hand clipper
(for mixing)

Hand clipper
(for piercing)

Note:
• Drawing above is from SP-10 BETA system (Stand alone unit) or SP-10 on HST system which
includes hand clipper for mixing.
• When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, there is no hand clipper for mixing.
• The hand clipper for mixing has a tube support bracket. If this part is removed, the hand
clipper will be the same as the hand clipper for piercing.

9-43
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

4 Install the new hand clippers with the fixing screws (2 each for piercing and
for mixing).

5 Close the CP cover.

9.6.3 Replacing rubber plate No. 39


If a hand clipper becomes slippery and is no longer able to hold a sample tube, follow the steps below to replace
anti-slip rubber plate No. 39.

Risk of infection
When replacing rubber plate No. 39, always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear,
and a lab coat. When finished, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens if there is blood contamination.

1 Run shutdown to shut down the device, and switch off the main power switch.

Warning!
Switch off the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before
performing the work.
Risk of electrical shock.

2 Open the CP cover.

3 Remove the hand clipper fixing screws (2 each for piercing and for mixing),
and remove the hand clippers.

Note:
When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, there is no special hand clipper for mixing.

9-44
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

4 Remove rubber plate No. 39 from the hand clipper.

Rubber plate No. 39


Hand clipper

5 Attach the new rubber plate No. 39 to the hand clipper.

6 Reinstall the hand clippers.

7 Close the CP cover.

9.6.4 Replacing a fuse


Over-current protection fuses are used in the main unit and pneumatic unit. If a fuse blows, follow the steps
below to replace it.

Warning!
Be sure to disconnect the power cord before replacing a fuse.
Risk of electrical shock.

1 Run shutdown to shut down the device, and switch off the main power switch.
Unplug the power cord of the unit with the fuse to be replaced.

2 Remove the fuse cap holder.


To remove the fuse cap holder, use a flathead screwdriver or similar Fuse
tool to press up on the clip.
Fuse cap holder

Clip

9-45
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

3 Replace the fuse and attach the fuse cap holder.

Warning!
Use a fuse of the specified type and rating.
Risk of smoke emission.

Fuse used in main unit


Specification Part Number Model name Type

100 VAC - 240 VAC 266-7767-7 Fuse 250 V 8 A 50T080H Time lag

Fuse used in pneumatic unit


Specification Part Number Model name Type

100 VAC - 117 VAC 266-5011-3 Fuse 250 V 4 A ST4-4A-N1 Time lag

220 VAC - 240 VAC AY579418 Fuse 250 V 3.15 A 02183.15MXP Time lag

9.6.5 Replacing the spreader glass


When the spreader glass usage has exceeded factory usage cycle limit, [Replace spreader glass]
message will appear prior to completion of startup sequence.
If this message appears, follow the steps below to replace the spreader glass.

Risk of infection
When replacing the spreader glass, always wear gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear,
and a lab coat. When finished, wash your hands with a disinfectant.
Risk of infection by pathogens if there is blood contamination.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

9-46
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

2 Touch [Spreader glass].


The screen on the right appears.

3 Touch [OK].
The smear unit moves to the front. While the smear unit moves, the
screen on the right appears.

4 When you are prompted to replace the spreader glass, open the top cover.

Warning!
When working with the top cover open, secure it in a position where it is stable. Otherwise, the
cover may fall and injure your head or other part of your body.

5 Remove the spreader glass from the spreader glass holder.


To remove, grasp the spreader glass and pull it towards you.

Note:
When replacing the spreader glass, the spreader glass holder may move horizontally or
vertically. This is not a problem.
Replace the spreader glass in the position that you find easiest.

9-47
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

6 With the smaller beveled corners toward you, insert the new spreader glass
into the spreader glass holder.
Insert the spreader glass all the way into the spreader glass holder
until it stops.

Large bevel
Large bevel

Small bevel
Small bevel

7 Close the top cover and touch [OK].


The smear unit returns to its home position. While the smear unit
moves, a message indicating that it is moving appears.
When the smear unit reaches its home position, the screen on the
right appears.
When closing the top cover, release the stopper.

8 Touch [OK].
The spreader glass operation count is reset, and the screen returns to the main maintenance screen.

9-48
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.6.6 Replacing the ink ribbon


If [Replace ink ribbon] or [No Ink ribbon] is displayed, follow the procedure below to replace the ink ribbon.

1 After the top cover lock is released, open the top cover.

Warning!
When working with the top cover open, secure it in a position where it is stable. Otherwise, the
cover may fall and injure your head or other part of your body.

Note:
If [No Ink ribbon] is displayed, smears can be prepared normally from all samples that have been
aspirated. The top cover lock will release after all samples have been fed into the stain tank.
However, if the ink ribbon is broken or tangled in a mechanical part, the sample prior to printing
will become an error sample. Follow the instructions in the action message to remove the
cassette.

2 Rotate the fan toward you and down.

Fan

Information
If you are using slide supply cassette 1, remove the cassette before tilting the fan down.

9-49
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

3 Pull the ribbon cartridge to the left and remove it from the device.

Information
When the ribbon cartridge is removed from the sample printer, [Ink ribbon was loaded
incorrectly.] will appear. Touch [OK] in the error dialog and continue replacement.

4 Lift both ink ribbon spindles and remove the used ink ribbon from the ribbon
cartridge.

5 Clean the ribbon roller.


Wipe the ribbon roller(black rubber) with a cotton swab, absorbent cotton, or non-woven fabric moistened with
disinfecting ethanol*.
* Use disinfecting ethanol with a purity of at least 70 %.

9-50
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

6 Follow the steps below to load the new ink ribbon in the ribbon cartridge.
1) Place the ink ribbon on a flat surface with the ribbon up, and pull
out a length of about 20 cm of ribbon from the spindle.
2) Place the ribbon cartridge on the ribbon.
3) Lift the ink ribbon spindles and place in the ribbon cartridge.
White
Blue

Information
White and blue rubber are attached to the ribbon cartridge. When placing the spindle, place in
the part with the rubber that is the same color as the spindle.

7 Turn the white spindle in the direction of the arrow so that the ribbon is taut.
Blue White
rubber rubber

Ink ribbon

8 Insert the ink cartridge to the right and into the device.

9-51
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9 Return the fan to its original position.


Fan

10 Close the top cover.


When closing the top cover, release the stopper.

11 Touch [OK].
When the error is cleared, the ribbon will rewind.

Note:
Multiple printer-related errors will appear in the error list screen; however, when the top error is
cleared, all the other errors will also be cleared.

9-52
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.7 Viewing histories

Note:
Each replacement log can be edited even while the device is in operation.

9.7.1 Viewing the supply parts history


Follow the steps below to check the spreader glass replacement history.
The supply parts history holds a maximum of 100 entries. Once 100 entries are stored, each new entry deletes
the oldest entry.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [History].
The history selection screen appears.

3 Touch [Parts history].


The screen on the right appears.
If 6 or more entries are stored, press [↑] or [↓] to change pages.
Press [Return] to close the [Supply parts history] screen and return to
the history selection screen.

[Date] Shows the date when the part was replaced.


[Time] Shows the time when the part was replaced.
[Contents] Shows the part that was replaced.

9-53
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9.7.2 Viewing the reagent replacement history


Follow the steps below to view the replacement history for methanol, stain 1, stain 2, buffer, rinse water, and
DCL.
The reagent replacement history holds a maximum of 100 entries. Once 100 entries are stored, each new entry
deletes the oldest entry.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [History].
The history selection screen appears.

3 Touch [Reagent history].


The screen on the right appears.
If 6 or more entries are stored, press [↑] or [↓] to change pages.

[Date] Shows the date when the reagent was replaced.


[Time] Shows the time when the reagent was replaced.
[Contents] Shows the reagent that was replaced.

9-54
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
9.8
Daily Maintenance Year: Month:
Day
Maintenance task
Run Shutdown 1
Clean spreader glass

SP-10 Instructions for Use


Check trap chamber
Clean single cassettes

Signature
Chapter 9

Weekly Maintenance Monthly Maintenance

Revised October 2018


Maintenance task mm/dd, signature mm/dd, signature mm/dd, signature mm/dd, signature Maintenance task mm/dd, signature

Clean staining line Clean racks, right and left sampler rack
pools, and measurement line
Run Shutdown 2

Supply Replacement
As-Needed Maintenance Maintenance task mm/dd, signature mm/dd, signature

Maintenance task mm/dd, signature mm/dd, signature Replace reagents


Cleaning smearing and staining line Replace hand clipper
SP-10 maintenance inspection checklist

Clean smearing line Replace rubber plate No. 39


Adjust air pressure Replace fuses
Replace waste container Replace spreader glass
Replace Stain Solution Replace ink ribbon
Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9-55
Chapter 9 Performing maintenance of device and replacing supply parts

9-56
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Warning!
Fragments of glass may occasionally fall into the device. When inserting your hand into the
device, be alert for fragments of glass.

10.1 Error dialog


If an error occurs while the device is running, an error dialog will appear
and an alarm will sound.
The error dialog shows the error name and other information. Touch [OK]
in the error dialog to stop the alarm and close the dialog.
If another error occurs while an error dialog is displayed, the error dialog
closes automatically and is replaced by the new error dialog.

Note:
If the same error as the error currently displayed in the error dialog occurs again, a new error
dialog will not appear and an alarm will not sound.

10.1.1 Error dialog colors and alarm sounds


Error dialog colors and alarm sounds vary depending on the level of the error. A higher error level (higher
number) indicates a fatal error.

Level Dialog color Alarm sound Meaning

An error that may occur during ordinary use and can be


Intermittent
1 Green resolved by the operator, such as a consumable supply
beep
running out.

An error, such as notification that a maintenance part


must be replaced, that allows operation to temporarily
Intermittent continue but which may interfere with operation and
2 Yellow
beep sample preparation, or an error that does not interfere
with sample preparation but requires intervention by the
operator.

10-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Level Dialog color Alarm sound Meaning

Alarm sound An error indicating abnormal movement of a mechanical


set in the part or a problem in a sensor that monitors such
3 Orange
alarm settings movement. Prompts for recovery by the operator or a
of the service technician.
environment
4 Red An error that requires an emergency stop.
settings

10.2 Error list screen


When the Help button is touched, the error list screen opens to show
current errors in order of priority.
The error list screen can show up to 256 errors at one time. When an error
is resolved, it is removed from the list.
When there are 6 or more errors in the list, [↑] and [↓] can be touched to
change pages.

[detail] Touch to display the action message for the error with the highest priority (the
error at the top of the error list).

10.3 Action messages


When the [detail] button is touched in the error list screen, an action
message appears.
The action message provides details on the error and indicates the action
to be taken. Take corrective action as instructed by the action message.
If multiple errors have occurred, the action message for the highest priority
error will appear.
If the action message does not fit in the screen, touch [↑] or [↓] to scroll.

[OK] Touch to execute the reset process.


[Err Unit] Touch to open the error location screen.
The error location screen shows a simple schematic
viewed from above the device with the location of
the error indicated by. Touch [Return] in the error
location screen to return to the action message.

10-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Note:
If the error is such that error location cannot be displayed, [Err Unit] will not be available at the
bottom of screen.

10.4 Viewing the error history


Follow the steps below to view the history of errors that have occurred.
The error history holds a maximum of 1,000 errors. When 1,000 errors have been stored, each new error deletes the
oldest error.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [History].
The history selection screen appears.

3 Touch [Error history].


The screen on the right appears.
If 6 or more entries are stored, press [↑] or [↓] to change pages.
Touch [←] or [→] to change the screen to display a long entry that
does not fit in the screen.

[Date] Shows the date on which the error occurred.


[Time] Shows the time at which the error occurred.
[Error] Shows what error occurred.
[Cond] Indicates the current status of the error as described below.
[Error] The error has occurred.
[Recover] The error has been cleared.

10-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.5 Error message list

10.5.1 Error message list in alphabetic order


0.053MPa vacuum err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
0.05MPa pressure err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
0.25MPa pressure err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Blood asp. sensor err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Blood disp. pipette move err (L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Blood disp. pipette move err (U/D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Buffer is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Buffer not filled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Cannot recognize CELLCLEAN AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Cannot recover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Cassette eject err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Cassette feed in move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cassette feed in move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cassette feed out err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out error at cassette dry pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Cassette rotate err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cassette shift err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cassette shift home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
CELLCLEAN AUTO has expired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
CELLCLEAN AUTO is not set correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Conveyor communication err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
CP cover is open.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
DCL is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
DCL not filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
DIA connection unit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
DIA connection unit nearly full. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Driver board err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Driver board Initialize err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Dry unit thermal err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Error history file err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Execute shutdown1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Execute shutdown2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Fail to insert slide into cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Hand home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Hand move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
HC communication err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
ID reader shift home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
ID reader shift move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Ink ribbon was loaded incorrectly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Low blood volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16, 10-39
Maintenance file err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Methanol not filled in chamber1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Methanol not filled in chamber2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Methanol pipette move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Methanol pipette move err (UP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Micro tube holder home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

10-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Micro tube holder move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26


No cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
No cassette at cassette shift home pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
No cassette at DIA connection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
No cassette at eject pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at feed out pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at methanol pipette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
No cassette at rinse pipette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at stain pipette1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at stain pipette2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at stain pipette3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at storage pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
No Ink ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
No rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
No slide at print pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
No slide at smear dry pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
No slide at smear dry pos. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
No slide at smear dry pos. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
No slide at smear pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
One printer head is broken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Piercer move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Pneumatic unit err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Power Supply Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Print data err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Rack feed in home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Rack feed in move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Rack feed out home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack feed out move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Rack full err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Rack ID read err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Rack move err1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack move err2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack move err3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Rack shift home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
RAM err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Remove cassette from table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replace buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Replace ink ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Replace rinse water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replace spreader glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Rinse stopper move err (DOWN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Rinse stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Rinse unit for spreader glass err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Rinse water is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Rinse water not filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
ROM err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Sample cassette not detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Sample Tube ID read err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Sampler Barcode reader err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Sampler start err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Setting file err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Shutdown was canceled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Shutdown was not executed correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Slide and cassette on the line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Slide dispenser (F/B) move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide dispenser (L/R) home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

10-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Slide dispenser (L/R) move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19


Slide insert home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Slide is in cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Slide lift-up unit home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide lift-up unit move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Slide printer err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Slide shift err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Slide shift to print pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Slide tower empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Slide tower1 empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Slide tower2 empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Smear list err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Smear not completed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Smear sensor err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Smear unit F/R err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Smear unit U/D err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Spreader glass dry unit err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Stain cover is open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Stain pipette1 move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette1 move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette2 move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette2 move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette3 move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Stain pipette3 move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Stain1 chamber1 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain1 chamber2 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain1 is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Stain1 not filled in chamber1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain1 not filled in chamber2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain2 chamber not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain2 is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Stain2 not filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Staining time over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Staining1 stopper move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining1 stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining2 stopper move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining2 stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining3 stopper move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining3 stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
STM controller err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Supply cassette.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Thermistor err by broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Top cover is open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Top or stain cover is open.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Tube clamp err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Tube mix err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Tube mixing pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Tube/blood sensor err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Unable to aspirate blood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Waste bottle1 full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Waste bottle2 full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Waste chamber1 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Waste chamber2 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Waste chamber3 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Water pipette move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Water pipette move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
WB asp. motor err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Worklist err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

10-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.5.2 Error messages listed by function

System related
RAM err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
ROM err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Smear list err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Worklist err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Setting file err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Error history file err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Maintenance file err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Driver board Initialize err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Driver board err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Whole blood aspiration related


Hand home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Hand move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Tube mixing pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Tube clamp err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Tube mix err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Whole blood aspiration and smearing related


Blood asp. sensor err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Unable to aspirate blood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Low blood volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Smear not completed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Smear sensor err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Rinse unit for spreader glass err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Smear preparation related (detection of mechanical part operation)


Piercer move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Blood disp. pipette move err (L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Blood disp. pipette move err (U/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
WB asp. motor err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Slide dispenser (L/R) home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide dispenser (L/R) move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide dispenser (F/B) move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide lift-up unit home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide lift-up unit move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Slide shift to print pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Slide insert home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Smear unit U/D err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Smear unit F/R err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Spreader glass dry unit err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Cassette shift home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Cassette shift err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cassette rotate err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cassette feed in move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Methanol pipette move err (UP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Methanol pipette move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette1 move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette1 move err (DOWN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

10-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Stain pipette2 move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23


Stain pipette2 move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Stain pipette3 move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Stain pipette3 move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Water pipette move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Water pipette move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Cassette feed out err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Cassette eject err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining1 stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining1 stopper move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining2 stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining2 stopper move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining3 stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Staining3 stopper move err (DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Rinse stopper move err (UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Rinse stopper move err (DOWN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Micro tube holder home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Micro tube holder move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Slide-related (slide presence detection)


Slide tower1 empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Slide tower2 empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Slide tower empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
No slide at smear pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Slide shift err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
No slide at smear dry pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
No slide at smear dry pos. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
No slide at smear dry pos. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
No slide at print pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Fail to insert slide into cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Slide is in cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Slide and cassette on the line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Slide move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Cassette-related (cassette presence detection)


No cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Supply cassette.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
No cassette at cassette shift home pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
No cassette at storage pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
No cassette at methanol pipette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cassette feed in move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
No cassette at stain pipette1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at stain pipette2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at stain pipette3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at rinse pipette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Cassette feed out error at cassette dry pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at feed out pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
No cassette at eject pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Remove cassette from table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Cassette full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Staining time over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

10-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Sample cassette not detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


Cannot recover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
DIA connection unit nearly full. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
DIA connection unit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
No cassette at DIA connection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Sampler-related
Rack feed in home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Rack feed in move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
No rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Rack shift home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Rack removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Rack move err1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack move err2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack move err3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack feed out home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Rack feed out move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tube/blood sensor err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Rack full err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Sampler start err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Low blood volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
ID reader shift home pos. err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
ID reader shift move err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Controller-related
STM controller err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Communication related
Conveyor communication err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
HC communication err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

BCR (barcode reader) related


Sampler Barcode reader err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Sample Tube ID read err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Rack ID read err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Printer related
Slide printer err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
No Ink ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
One printer head is broken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Print data err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Replace ink ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Ink ribbon was loaded incorrectly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Pressure related
0.25MPa pressure err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
0.05MPa pressure err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
0.053MPa vacuum err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Pneumatic unit err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

10-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Temperature related
Dry unit thermal err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Thermistor err by broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Chamber-related
Methanol not filled in chamber1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Methanol not filled in chamber2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
DCL not filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Stain1 chamber1 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain1 chamber2 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain1 not filled in chamber1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain1 not filled in chamber2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain2 chamber not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stain2 not filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Rinse water not filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Buffer not filled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Waste chamber1 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Waste chamber2 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Waste chamber3 not draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replace rinse water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replace buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Waste bottle1 full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Waste bottle2 full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Maintenance related
Replace spreader glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Execute shutdown1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Execute shutdown2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Stain1 is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Stain2 is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Buffer is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Rinse water is expired.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
DCL is expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
CELLCLEAN AUTO is not set correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Cannot recognize CELLCLEAN AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
CELLCLEAN AUTO has expired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Others
Shutdown was not executed correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
CP cover is open.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Power Supply Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Top or stain cover is open.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Top cover is open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Stain cover is open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Shutdown was canceled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

10-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.6 Cause of errors and remedial actions

System related
Error message RAM err

Probable cause There is an error in RAM.

Action Turn the power off and then back on.


If the problem is not resolved by turning the power off and on, the CPU board may
have failed.

Error recovery condition Power off

Error message ROM err

Probable cause There is an error in ROM.

Action Turn the power off and then back on.


If the problem is not resolved by turning the power off and on, the CPU board may
have failed.

Error recovery condition Power off

Error message Smear list err

Probable cause There is an error in the smear list file.

Action Initialize the file.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Worklist err

Probable cause There is an error in the worklist.

Action Initialize the file.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Setting file err

Probable cause There is an error in the setting file.

Action Initialize the file.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Error history file err

Probable cause There is an error in the error history file.

Action Initialize the file.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Maintenance file err

Probable cause There is an error in the maintenance file.

Action Initialize the file.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Driver board Initialize err

Probable cause There is a problem in the driver board FPGA.

Action Turn the power off and then back on.


If the problem is not resolved by turning the power off and on, the driver board may
have failed.

Error recovery condition Power off

Error message Driver board err

Probable cause The sensitivity of the driver board cannot be adjusted.

Action Turn the power off and then back on.


If the problem is not resolved by turning the power off and on, the driver board may
have failed.

Error recovery condition Power off

10-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Whole blood aspiration related


Error message Hand home pos. err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the home position or range of movement of the hand.
2) A partially or completely peeled test tube label may have interfered.

Action 1) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then remove any foreign objects that are
in the home position and range of movement of the hand. Follow the instructions
in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset. After resetting, apply the label so that it is firmly adhered to the
tube and will not catch, then re-introduce onto the device.
* When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, the rack cannot be removed.
Remove only the sample tube.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Hand move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the pickup position or range of movement of the hand.
2) A partially or completely peeled test tube label may have interfered.

Action 1) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then remove any foreign objects that are
in the range of movement of the hand. Follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset. After resetting, apply the label so that it is firmly adhered to the
tube and will not catch, then re-introduce onto the device.
* When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, the rack cannot be removed.
Remove only the sample tube.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Tube mixing pos. err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the mixing position or range of movement of the hand.
2) A partially or completely peeled test tube label may have interfered.

Action 1) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then remove any foreign objects that are
in the mixing position and range of movement of the hand. Follow the instructions
in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset. After resetting, apply the label so that it is firmly adhered to the
tube and will not catch, then re-introduce onto the device.
* When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, the rack cannot be removed.
Remove only the sample tube.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Tube clamp err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the aspiration position or range of movement of the
hand.
2) A partially or completely peeled test tube label may have interfered.
3) The hand is not holding the sample tube.
4) The sample tube cap is not correctly closed.

Action 1) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then remove any foreign objects that are
in the mixing position and range of movement of the hand. Follow the instructions
in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset. After resetting, apply the label so that it is firmly adhered to the
tube and will not catch, then re-introduce onto the device.
3) Remove the rack* and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
Place the sample tubes and rack, and repeat smear preparation.
4) Remove the rack* and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
Close the cap, place the sample tubes and rack, and perform sample preparation.
* When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, the rack cannot be removed.
Remove only the sample tube.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Tube mix err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the sample tube mixing area.
2) A partially or completely peeled test tube label may have interfered.

Action 1) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then remove any foreign objects that are
in the sample tube mixing area. Follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.
2) Remove the sample tube and rack*, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset. After resetting, apply the label so that it is firmly adhered to the
tube and will not catch, then re-introduce onto the device.
* When the XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected, the rack cannot be removed.
Remove only the sample tube.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Whole blood aspiration and smearing related


Error message Blood asp. sensor err

Probable cause 1) The blood aspiration tube is dirty.


2) Blockage in the blood aspiration line (piercer or tube).
3) The blood aspiration sensor has failed.

Action 1) After the system enters the ready state, run smear rinse from the maintenance
menu to rinse the whole blood aspiration tube.
2) After the system enters the ready state, run smear rinse from the maintenance
menu to rinse the whole blood aspiration tube. If this procedure does not correct
the problem, the piercer must be replaced. Contact your local Sysmex
representative.
3) The blood aspiration sensor must be replaced. The device can be used on a
temporary basis by changing the blood sensor setting so that the blood sensor is
not used. For the details on blood sensor setting, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-10 "Chapter 8: 8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings")

Error recovery condition Turn off the power or set the blood aspiration sensor to [Not Use].

Error message Unable to aspirate blood

Probable cause 1) Blockage in the blood aspiration line (piercer or tube).


2) The blood aspiration sensor has failed.

Action 1) After the system enters the ready state, run smear rinse from the maintenance
menu to rinse the whole blood aspiration tube. If this procedure does not correct
the problem, the piercer must be replaced. Contact your local Sysmex
representative.
2) The blood aspiration sensor must be replaced. The device can be used on a
temporary basis by changing the blood sensor setting so that the blood sensor is
not used. For the details on blood sensor setting, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-10 "Chapter 8: 8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Low blood volume

Probable cause 1) The blood volume is less than required.


2) Blockage in the blood aspiration line (piercer or tube).
3) The blood aspiration sensor has failed.

Action 1) Place a sample tube with the necessary blood volume and then prepare the
smear.
2) After the system enters the ready state, run smear rinse from the maintenance
menu to rinse the whole blood aspiration tube. If this procedure does not correct
the problem, the piercer must be replaced. Contact your local Sysmex
representative.
3) The blood aspiration sensor must be replaced. The device can be used on a
temporary basis by changing the blood sensor setting so that the blood sensor is
not used. For the details on blood sensor setting, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-10 "Chapter 8: 8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Smear not completed

Probable cause 1) The smear was prepared with blood of a very low Hgb value.
2) The slide glass is dirty.
3) The blood dispensing pipette is dirty and the blood was not dispensed normally.
4) The smear was not spread normally because the spreader glass is dirty.
5) The smear sensor has failed.

Action 1) The device can be used on a temporary basis by changing the smear sensor
setting so that the smear sensor is not used. For the details on smear sensor, see
Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-10 "Chapter 8: 8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings")
2) Install a clean slide glass.
3) After the system enters the ready state, run smear rinse from the maintenance
menu to rinse the whole blood aspiration tube.
4) Follow the spreader glass cleaning procedure to clean the spreader glass.
5) The smear sensor must be replaced. The device can be used on a temporary
basis by changing the smear sensor setting so that the smear sensor is not used.
For the details on smear sensor, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-10 "Chapter 8: 8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Smear sensor err

Probable cause 1) The slide glass is dirty.


2) There is a foreign object in the optical path of the sensor.
3) The smear sensor has failed.

Action 1) Install a clean slide glass.


2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) The smear sensor must be replaced. The device can be used on a temporary
basis by changing the smear sensor setting so that the smear sensor is not used.
For the details on smear sensor, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-10 "Chapter 8: 8.3.2 Configuring sensor settings")

Error recovery condition Turn off the power or set the smear sensor to [Not Use].

Error message Rinse unit for spreader glass err

Probable cause Broken wire or short circuit in the ultrasonic oscillator or its wiring.

Action The ultrasonic oscillator or its wiring must be replaced.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Smear preparation related (detection of mechanical part operation)


Error message Piercer move err

Probable cause 1) A unusable sample tube was used.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the piercer mechanism.
3) A wire or tube is in the way of the piercer mechanism.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. Change to a sample tube
that is usable and then perform smear preparation.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-17
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Blood disp. pipette move err (L/R)

Probable cause 1) The micro collection sample tube holder is too low.
2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the blood dispensing pipette
mechanism.
3) A wire or tube is in the way of the blood dispensing pipette mechanism.

Action 1) Raise the micro collection sample tube holder to its top stop point, and then follow
the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Blood disp. pipette move err (U/D)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the blood dispensing pipette
mechanism.
2) A wire or tube is in the way of the blood dispensing pipette mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message WB asp. motor err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the whole blood aspiration
motor mechanism.
2) A wire or tube is in the way of the whole blood aspiration motor mechanism.
3) The whole blood aspiration tube is blocked.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) After the system enters the ready state, run smear rinse from the maintenance
menu to rinse the whole blood aspiration tube.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-18
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Slide dispenser (L/R) home pos. err


Slide dispenser (L/R) move err

Probable cause 1) The slide supply cassette is not placed correctly.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the slide dispenser
mechanism.
3) A wire is in the way of the slide dispenser mechanism.

Action 1) Place the slide supply cassette correctly, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide dispenser (F/B) move err

Probable cause 1) The slide supply cassette is not placed correctly.


2) The slide supply unit is not secured properly.
3) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the slide supply mechanism.
4) A wire is in the way of the slide supply mechanism.

Action 1) Place the slide supply cassette correctly, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.
2) Secure the slide supply unit properly, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
3) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
4) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide lift-up unit home pos. err


Slide lift-up unit move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the smear drier vertical
movement mechanism.
2) A wire is in the way of the smear drier vertical movement mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-19
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Slide shift to print pos. err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the slide print feed
mechanism.
2) A wire is in the way of the slide print feed mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide insert home pos. err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the slide insert mechanism.
2) A wire is in the way of the slide insert mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Smear unit U/D err

Probable cause 1) The spreader glass is not installed correctly.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the spreader unit
mechanism.
3) A wire is in the way of the smear unit mechanism.

Action 1) Install the spreader glass correctly and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-20
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Smear unit F/R err

Probable cause 1) The spreader glass is not installed correctly.


2) The micro collection sample tube holder is too low.
3) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the spreader unit
mechanism.
4) A wire is in the way of the smear unit mechanism.

Action 1) Install the spreader glass correctly and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Raise the micro collection sample tube holder to its top stop point, and then follow
the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
4) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Spreader glass dry unit err

Probable cause 1) The spreader glass is not installed correctly.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the spreader glass drier unit
mechanism.
3) A wire is in the way of the spreader glass drier unit mechanism.

Action 1) Install the spreader glass correctly and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette shift home pos. err

Probable cause 1) The cassette is not placed correctly.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette shift
mechanism.
3) A wire is in the way of the cassette shift mechanism.

Action 1) Place the cassette correctly, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-21
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Cassette shift err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette shift
mechanism.
2) The next cassette is not placed correctly.
3) A wire is in the way of the cassette shift mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Place the cassette correctly, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette rotate err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette shift
mechanism.
2) The cassette is not correctly shifted to the rotation position.
3) A wire is in the way of the cassette shift mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Restore the cassette shift mechanism to normal operation by removing any
foreign objects, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette feed in move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette feed-in
mechanism.
2) The cassette is not correctly shifted to the feed-in position.
3) The methanol pipette is interfering with the cassette and the cassette is out of
position.
4) A wire is in the way of the cassette feed-in mechanism.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-22
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Methanol pipette move err (UP)


Methanol pipette move err (DOWN)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the methanol pipette.
2) A wire is in the way of the methanol pipette.
3) The methanol pipette is out of position.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Stain pipette1 move err (UP)


Stain pipette1 move err (DOWN)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of stain pipette 1.
2) A wire is in the way of stain pipette 1.
3) Stain pipette 1 is out of position.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Stain pipette2 move err (UP)


Stain pipette2 move err (DOWN)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of stain pipette 2.
2) A wire is in the way of stain pipette 2.
3) Stain pipette 2 is out of position.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-23
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Stain pipette3 move err (UP)


Stain pipette3 move err (DOWN)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of stain pipette 3.
2) A wire is in the way of stain pipette 3.
3) Stain pipette 3 is out of position.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Water pipette move err (UP)


Water pipette move err (DOWN)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the rinse pipette.
2) A wire is in the way of the rinse pipette.
3) The rinse pipette is out of position.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette feed out err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the feed-out mechanism.
2) A cassette is in the way of the feed-out mechanism.
3) A wire is in the way of the feed-out mechanism.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-24
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Cassette eject err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the eject mechanism.
2) A cassette is in the way of the eject mechanism.
3) A wire is in the way of the eject mechanism.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Remove cassettes and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Staining1 stopper move err (UP)


Staining1 stopper move err (DOWN)
Staining2 stopper move err (UP)
Staining2 stopper move err (DOWN)
Staining3 stopper move err (UP)
Staining3 stopper move err (DOWN)
Rinse stopper move err (UP)
Rinse stopper move err (DOWN)

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the stopper.
2) Slow cylinder movement.
3) A cassette is in the way of the stopper.
4) A wire is in the way of the stopper.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-25
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Micro tube holder home pos. err


Micro tube holder move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the micro collection sample
tube holder.
2) The micro collection sample tube is in the way of the micro collection sample tube
holder.
3) The micro collection sample tube holder mechanism does not move smoothly.
4) A tube or wire is in the way of the micro collection sample tube holder.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Remove the micro collection sample tube and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Slide-related (slide presence detection)


Error message Slide tower1 empty

Probable cause 1) There are no slides in slide tower 1.


2) Slide frosted edge is outside of specifications.

Action 1) Fill the slide supply cassette with slides and place in position 1, and then repeat
smear preparation.
2) Load recommended slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide tower2 empty

Probable cause 1) There are no slides in slide tower 2.


2) Slide frosted edge is outside of specifications.

Action 1) Fill the slide supply cassette with slides and place in position 2, and then repeat
smear preparation.
2) Load recommended slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-26
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Slide tower empty

Probable cause 1) There are no slides in slide towers 1 and 2.


2) Slide frosted edge is outside of specifications.

Action 1) Fill the slide supply cassette with slides and place in position 1 or 2, and then
repeat smear preparation.
2) Load recommended slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No slide at smear pos.

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the slide clamp mechanism.
3) There is a foreign object in the smear position.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset then load recommended
slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide shift err

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in the slide shift unit.
3) Slides are not conveyed to the slide shift unit.
4) There are no slides in the slide supply cassette.

Action 1) Reset as appropriate for the error then load recommended slides and
re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Resolve the slide dispenser or supply unit error, and then follow the instructions in
the action message to reset.
4) Clean the slide detection sensor and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-27
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message No slide at smear dry pos.

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in the slide shift unit.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset then load recommended
slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No slide at smear dry pos. 1

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in smear dry position 1.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset then load recommended
slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No slide at smear dry pos. 2

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in smear dry position 2.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset then load recommended
slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-28
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message No slide at print pos.

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in the print position.
3) The light shield for the print position arrival sensor does not operate normally.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset then load recommended
slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Remove any foreign objects from the print position sensor mechanism to restore
the light shield to normal operation, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Fail to insert slide into cassette

Probable cause 1) Slides being used do not meet recommended specifications.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette rotator.
3) The light shield for the print position arrival sensor does not operate normally.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset then load recommended
slides and re-introduce sample for smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Remove any foreign objects from the print position sensor mechanism to restore
the light shield to normal operation, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide is in cassette

Probable cause 1) There is a slide in the cassette.


2) There is a foreign object in the optical path of the slide detection sensor in the
cassette.

Action 1) Place an empty cassette, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-29
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Slide and cassette on the line

Probable cause 1) A slide or cassette remains on the line.


2) There is a foreign object in the optical paths of the sensors.

Action 1) Remove the slide or cassette, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Slide move err

Probable cause 1) A slide did not properly move from area.


2) There is a foreign object in the optical paths of the sensors.

Action 1) Remove the slide or cassette, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Cassette-related (cassette presence detection)


Error message No cassette

Probable cause 1) There is no cassette on the cassette supply table.


2) The cassette is not placed correctly on the cassette supply table.

Action 1) Place a cassette, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Place the cassette correctly, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Supply cassette.

Probable cause 1) There are ten or less cassettes on the cassette supply table.
2) There are cassettes on the cassette supply table, but there is no cassette in the
remaining cassette sensor unit.

Action 1) Add cassettes, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Place the cassettes so that there are no gaps between them, and then follow the
instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-30
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message No cassette at cassette shift home pos.

Probable cause 1) The cassette is not placed correctly on the cassette supply table.
2) There is a foreign object in the optical path of the cassette detection sensor on the
cassette supply table.

Action 1) Place the cassette correctly, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No cassette at storage pos.

Probable cause 1) A foreign object or other condition is preventing the cassettes from being
conveyed to the cassette rotation position.
2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette rotator.

Action Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No cassette at methanol pipette

Probable cause There is a foreign object in the cassette shift unit.

Action Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette feed in move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the stain pool entrance.


2) The cassette detection sensor at the methanol pipette position is dirty.

Action Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-31
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message No cassette at stain pipette1


No cassette at stain pipette2
No cassette at stain pipette3
No cassette at rinse pipette

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the stain pool.


2) The cassette cannot be conveyed normally because it is dirty.
3) The stopper sensor is dirty and does not operate normally.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette feed out err at stain pipette1


Cassette feed out err at stain pipette2
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette3
Cassette feed out error at cassette dry pos.

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the stain tank.


2) The cassette cannot be conveyed normally because it is dirty.
3) The feed sensor is dirty and does not operate normally.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No cassette at feed out pos.

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the stain tank.


2) The cassette cannot be conveyed normally because it is dirty.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message No cassette at eject pos.

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the cassette feed-out
mechanism.
2) The cassette cannot be conveyed normally because it is dirty.
3) A wire or tube is in the way of the cassette feed-out mechanism.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-32
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Remove cassette from table

Probable cause 1) There are 70 or more cassettes on the cassette feed-out table.
2) There is a foreign object on the cassette feed-out table.
3) There is a foreign object in the optical path of the cassette detection sensor on the
cassette feed-out table.
4) The cassette detection sensor on the cassette feed-out table is dirty and does not
operate correctly.

Action 1) Remove cassettes and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
4) Clean the sensor, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cassette full

Probable cause 1) The cassette feed-out table is full.


2) There is a foreign object on the cassette feed-out table.
3) There is a foreign object in the optical path of the cassette detection sensor on the
cassette feed-out table.
4) The cassette detection sensor on the cassette feed-out table is dirty and does not
operate correctly.

Action 1) Remove cassettes and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
4) Clean the sensor, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Staining time over

Probable cause 1) The stain time has been exceeded due to another error (pipette movement error).
2) The cassette has stopped in the stain pool due to dirt on the cassette.

Action 1) Resolve the other error, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.
2) Clean the cassette, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-33
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Sample cassette not detected

Probable cause 1) During startup, shutdown, or cleaning, another error (pressure error, etc.)
prevented the next operation from being performed.
2) The cassette has stopped in the stain pool due to dirt on the cassette.

Action 1) Resolve the other error, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.
2) Clean the cassette, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cannot recover.

Probable cause The cassette returned from a downstream process during reset when the Recovery
Action setting is [Use].

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message DIA connection unit nearly full.

Probable cause 1) The number of cassettes stored in the DIA connection unit is equal to or over the
specified number.
2) There is a foreign object on the cassette table of the DIA connection unit.

Action 1) Automatically recovers when analysis is performed on the DIA and sufficient
space becomes free in the DIA connection unit. Do not prepare the next slide until
sufficient space is free in the DIA connection unit.
2) Remove the foreign object. Recovery will take place automatically.

Error recovery condition –

10-34
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message DIA connection unit error

Probable cause 1) The power of the DIA connection unit is turned off.
2) The cable that connects the DIA connection unit is disconnected.
3) There is an error in the DIA connection unit.
4) A cassette cannot be fed because the DIA connection is full.

Action 1) Turn on the power of the DIA connection unit. Recovery will take place
automatically.
2) Reconnect the cable that connects the DIA connection unit. Recovery will take
place automatically.
3) Clear the error in the DIA connection unit. In the case of an SP-10 error, recovery
will take place automatically.
During the DIA connection unit error, a cassette fed to the DIA will be stored on
the cassette feed-out table of the SP-10. Place the cassette in the DIA connection
unit by hand.
4) Check the DIA connection unit and smear list, and touch [OK].
Place any cassettes that have been stored inside the SP in the DIA connection unit
by hand as needed.

Error recovery condition –

Error message No cassette at DIA connection unit

Probable cause There is a foreign object in the cassette reception area of the DIA connection unit.

Action Remove the foreign object and reset the DIA connection unit. In the case of an SP-10
error, recovery will take place automatically.

Error recovery condition –

Sampler-related
Error message Rack feed in home pos. err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the right rack pool of the
sampler.
2) The rack is not placed correctly.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place the
rack again and repeat smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-35
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Rack feed in move err


No rack

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the right rack pool of the
sampler.
2) The rack is not placed correctly.
3) Dirt on the rack feed-in position sensor.
4) The rack moved unexpectedly during sampler analysis.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place the
rack again and repeat smear preparation.
3) Clean the sensor, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) The analysis results and the sample numbers may not be correctly matched.
Check the analysis results of all samples inserted in the rack on the measurement
line.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Rack shift home pos. err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the rack on the sampler
measurement line.
2) The rack is not placed correctly.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Place the rack correctly, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Rack removed

Probable cause 1) The rack was moved.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the sampler.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place the
rack again and repeat smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-36
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Rack move err1

Probable cause 1) Rack movement is obstructed.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the sampler.
3) The sample tubes are not placed correctly in the rack.
4) The rack moved unexpectedly during sampler analysis.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place the
rack again and repeat smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) The analysis results and the sample numbers may not be correctly matched. Check
the analysis results of all samples inserted in the rack on the measurement line.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Rack move err2

Probable cause 1) The rack was moved.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the sampler.
3) The sample tubes are not placed correctly in the rack.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place the
rack again and repeat smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Rack move err3

Probable cause The rack was moved.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


After resetting, place the rack again and repeat smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Rack feed out home pos. err

Probable cause There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the rack feed-out lever.

Action Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-37
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Rack feed out move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the left rack pool of the
sampler.
2) Rack movement is obstructed.
3) The rack cannot move properly because of dirt on the rack movement table.
4) The rack moved unexpectedly during sampler analysis.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place the
rack again and repeat smear preparation.
3) Clean the table, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) The analysis results and the sample numbers may not be correctly matched.
Check the analysis results of all samples in the rack on the measurement line as
well as all samples inserted in the rack that has just been fed out.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Tube/blood sensor err

Probable cause 1) The blood sensor is dirty.


2) Unusable sample tubes are used.

Action 1) Clean the sensor, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. After resetting, place
usable sample tubes and repeat smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Turn off the power or set the blood sensor to [Not Use].

Error message Rack full err

Probable cause 1) The left rack pool of the sampler is full.


2) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the left rack pool of the
sampler.
3) The rack full sensor is dirty.

Action 1) Remove the rack and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Clean the sensor, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-38
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Sampler start err

Probable cause 1) There is a rack on the sampler measurement line.


2) There is a foreign object on the sampler measurement line.

Action 1) Remove the rack and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Low blood volume

Probable cause The blood volume in the sample tube is less than the required volume.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.


After resetting, place a sample tube with at least the required volume of blood and
repeat smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message ID reader shift home pos. err


ID reader shift move err

Probable cause 1) There is a foreign object in the range of movement of the barcode reader.
2) A wire or tube is in the way of the moving parts of the barcode reader.

Action 1) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-39
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Controller-related
Error message STM controller err

Probable cause I/O board error.

Action Turn the power off and then back on.


If the problem is not resolved by turning the power off and on, the I/O board may have
failed.

Error recovery condition Power off

Communication related
Error message Conveyor communication err

Probable cause 1) The conveyor power is turned off.


2) The cable that connects to the conveyor is disconnected.
3) The cable that connects to the conveyor has a broken wire.
4) There is an error in the conveyor.

Action 1) Turn on the conveyor power, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Reconnect the conveyor cable, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) Resolve the error in the conveyor, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message HC communication err

Probable cause 1) The power of the host computer is turned off.


2) The cable that connects to the host computer is disconnected.
3) The cable that connects to the host computer has a broken wire.
4) There is an error in the host computer.

Action 1) Turn on the host computer power, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Reconnect the host computer cable, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
4) Resolve the error in the host computer, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-40
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

BCR (barcode reader) related


Error message Sampler Barcode reader err

Probable cause The barcode reader has malfunctioned.

Action Turn the power off and then back on.


If turning the power off and on does not reset the error, the barcode reader may have
failed.
The device can be used on a temporary basis by changing the ID reader setting to
not used. For the details on ID barcodes, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-12 "Chapter 8: 8.3.4 ID barcode settings")

Error recovery condition Power off

Error message Sample Tube ID read err

Probable cause 1) The barcode label is dirty.


2) The barcode label is not facing forward.
3) A barcode label has not been affixed.
4) The reading window of the barcode reader is dirty.
5) The barcode reader has malfunctioned.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. Affix a clean barcode label,
and then repeat smear preparation.
2) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. Set the sample tube so that
the barcode label faces the reader, and then repeat smear preparation.
3) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. Affix a barcode label on the
sample tube, and then repeat smear preparation.
4) Clean the reading window, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
5) Turn the power off and then back on. If turning the power off and on does not
reset the error, the barcode reader may have failed. The device can be used on a
temporary basis by changing the ID reader setting to not used. For the details on
ID barcodes, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-12 "Chapter 8: 8.3.4 ID barcode settings")

Error recovery condition 1) Touch [OK] in the action message.


2) Touch [OK] in the action message.
3) Touch [OK] in the action message.
4) Touch [OK] in the action message.
5) Power off

10-41
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Rack ID read err

Probable cause 1) The barcode label is dirty.


2) The reading window of the barcode reader is dirty.
3) The barcode reader has malfunctioned.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset. Affix a clean barcode label,
and then repeat smear preparation.
2) Clean the reading window, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
3) Turn the power off and then back on. If turning the power off and on does not
reset the error, the barcode reader may have failed. The device can be used on a
temporary basis by changing the ID reader setting to not used. For the details on
ID barcodes, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-12 "Chapter 8: 8.3.4 ID barcode settings")

Error recovery condition 1) Touch [OK] in the action message.


2) Touch [OK] in the action message.
3) Power off

Printer related
Error message Slide printer err

Probable cause There is an error in the printer.

Action Turn the power off and then back on. If turning the power off and on does not reset
the error, the printer may have failed.

Error recovery condition Power off

Error message No Ink ribbon

Probable cause 1) Out of ink ribbon.


2) The ink ribbon has been severed.
3) The ink ribbon is in the way of the mechanical parts.

Action Replace the ink ribbon, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset. For the details on replacing the ink ribbon, see Chapter 9.
(➤P.9-49 "Chapter 9: 9.6.6 Replacing the ink ribbon")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-42
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message One printer head is broken.

Probable cause Broken wire in the printer head.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Print data err

Probable cause Attempted to print a character that cannot be printed in the specified barcode.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Replace ink ribbon

Probable cause There is little ink ribbon left.

Action Obtain a replacement ink ribbon.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Ink ribbon was loaded incorrectly.

Probable cause A ribbon cartridge is not loaded.

Action Load the ribbon cartridge and follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-43
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Pressure related
Error message 0.25MPa pressure err
0.05MPa pressure err
0.053MPa vacuum err

Probable cause 1) The adjusted pressure has changed due to a change of pressure in the
pneumatic unit.
2) There is a kink in the tube between the pneumatic unit and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
3) The pneumatic unit is not operating normally.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to readjust the pressure and reset.
2) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the pneumatic unit and the
main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Check the power cable of the pneumatic unit, and then follow the instructions in
the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Information
If [0.053MPa vacuum err] does not reset even when the above actions are taken, the valve
setting may be wrong. In this case, it is not possible to reset by following the instructions in the
action message.

Error message Pneumatic unit err

Probable cause 1) The pneumatic unit has stopped.


2) The tube between the pneumatic unit and the main unit is disconnected.

Action 1) Check the power cable of the pneumatic unit, and then follow the instructions in
the action message to reset.
2) Check the tube between the pneumatic unit and the main unit, and then follow the
instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-44
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Temperature related
Error message Dry unit thermal err

Probable cause 1) The thermistor has failed.


2) The heater has failed.

Action 1) The device can be used on a temporary basis by changing the heater setting to
not used. For the details on stain settings, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-27 "Chapter 8: 8.4.3 Setting the stain conditions")
2) The device can be used on a temporary basis by changing the heater setting to
not used. For the details on stain settings, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-27 "Chapter 8: 8.4.3 Setting the stain conditions")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Information
This error cannot be reset by following the instructions in the action message.

Error message Thermistor err by broken wire

Probable cause The thermistor has failed or has a broken wire.

Action The device can be used on a temporary basis by changing the heater setting to not
used. For the details on stain settings, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-27 "Chapter 8: 8.4.3 Setting the stain conditions")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Information
This error cannot be reset by following the instructions in the action message.

10-45
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Chamber-related
Error message Methanol not filled in chamber1.
Methanol not filled in chamber2.

Probable cause 1) Out of methanol.


2) There is a kink in the tube between the reagent container and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
3) The air hole in the reagent container is blocked.

Action 1) Replace the methanol, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.
2) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the reagent container and
the main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Clean the air hole in the reagent container, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message DCL not filled

Probable cause 1) Out of CELLPACK DCL.


2) There is a kink in the tube between the reagent container and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
3) The air hole in the reagent container is blocked.
4) Diluted CELLPACK DST is not supplied from the RU (when the RU is connected).

Action 1) Replace the CELLPACK DCL, and then follow the instructions in the action
message to reset.
2) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the reagent container and
the main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Clean the air hole in the reagent container, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.
4) Check the RU.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-46
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Stain1 not filled in chamber1


Stain1 not filled in chamber2

Probable cause 1) Out of stain 1.


2) There is a kink in the tube between the reagent container and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
3) The air hole in the reagent container is blocked.

Action 1) Replace stain 1, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the reagent container and
the main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Clean the air hole in the reagent container, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Stain2 not filled

Probable cause 1) Out of stain 2.


2) There is a kink in the tube between the reagent container and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
3) The air hole in the reagent container is blocked.

Action 1) Replace stain 2, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the reagent container and
the main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
3) Clean the air hole in the reagent container, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Stain1 chamber1 not draining


Stain1 chamber2 not draining
Stain2 chamber not draining

Probable cause There is a kink in the waste tube or it is blocked.

Action Check the waste tube, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-47
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Rinse water not filled

Probable cause 1) There is a kink in the tube between the reagent container and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
2) The air hole in the reagent container is blocked.

Action 1) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the reagent container and
the main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Clean the air hole in the reagent container, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Buffer not filled.

Probable cause 1) There is a kink in the tube between the reagent container and the main unit.
A connection nipple is loose.
2) The air hole in the reagent container is blocked.

Action 1) Check the connection nipples and the tube between the reagent container and
the main unit, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.
2) Clean the air hole in the reagent container, and then follow the instructions in the
action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Waste chamber1 not draining


Waste chamber2 not draining
Waste chamber3 not draining

Probable cause There is a kink in the waste tube or it is blocked.

Action Check the waste tube, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Replace rinse water

Probable cause 1) Out of rinse water.


2) The float of the float switch is in the way of the tube and cannot move.

Action 1) Replenish the rinse water, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Disentangle the tube, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-48
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Replace buffer

Probable cause 1) Out of buffer.


2) The float of the float switch is in the way of the tube and cannot move.

Action 1) Replenish the buffer, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.
2) Disentangle the tube, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Waste bottle1 full


Waste bottle2 full

Probable cause 1) The waste container is full.


2) The float of the waste sensor assembly is dirty and cannot move.

Action 1) Discard the waste fluid, and then follow the instructions in the action message to
reset.
2) Clean the float, and then follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Maintenance related
Error message Replace spreader glass

Probable cause The spreader glass is due for replacement.

Action Replace the spreader glass


For the details on replacing the spreader glass, see Chapter 9.
(➤P.9-46 "Chapter 9: 9.6.5 Replacing the spreader glass")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Execute shutdown1

Probable cause [Shutdown1] has not been run for 24 hours or more since the power was turned on.

Action Run [Shutdown1].

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-49
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Execute shutdown2

Probable cause One week or more has elapsed since the last time [Shutdown2] was run.

Action Run [Shutdown2].

Error recovery Touch [OK] in the action message.


condition

Error message Stain1 is expired.


Stain2 is expired.
Buffer is expired.
Rinse water is expired.
DCL is expired.

Probable cause The expiration date has passed.

Action Replace the reagent.


* DCL means CELLPACK DCL.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message CELLCLEAN AUTO is not set correctly

Probable cause CELLCLEAN AUTO is not placed correctly.

Action Place CELLCLEAN AUTO correctly. For the correct placement procedure, see
Chapter 9.
(➤P.9-2 "Chapter 9: 9.1.1 Performing [Shutdown1]")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Cannot recognize CELLCLEAN AUTO

Probable cause 1) The reading window of the barcode reader is dirty.


2) The barcode reader has malfunctioned.

Action 1) Clean the reading window, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
2) Turn the power off and then back on. If turning the power off and on does not
reset the error, the barcode reader may have failed. The device can be used on a
temporary basis by changing the ID reader setting to not used. For the details on
ID barcodes, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.8-12 "Chapter 8: 8.3.4 ID barcode settings")

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-50
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message CELLCLEAN AUTO has expired

Probable cause The expiration date has passed.

Action Replace CELLCLEAN AUTO, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Others
Error message Shutdown was not executed correctly.

Probable cause The power was turned off without running shutdown.

Action Run shutdown and then turn off the power.

Error recovery condition -

Error message CP cover is open.

Probable cause The CP (Cap Piercing) cover is open.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset, and then close the CP cover
and repeat smear preparation.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Power Supply Error

Probable cause The power supply has deviated from the rated conditions.

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Top or stain cover is open.


Probable cause 1) The top cover is open or the stain tank cover is open.
2) A foreign object is preventing the top cover or stain tank cover sensor from
operating.
Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset, and then close the top
cover or stain tank cover and repeat smear preparation. When closing the top
cover, release the stopper.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.
Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-51
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Error message Top cover is open.

Probable cause 1) The top cover is open.


2) A foreign object is preventing the top cover sensor from operating.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset, and then close the top
cover and repeat smear preparation. When closing the top cover, release the
stopper.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Stain cover is open.

Probable cause 1) The stain tank cover is open.


2) A foreign object is preventing the stain tank cover sensor from operating.

Action 1) Follow the instructions in the action message to reset, and then close the stain
tank cover and repeat smear preparation.
2) Remove the foreign object, and then follow the instructions in the action message
to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

Error message Shutdown was canceled.

Probable cause A shutdown command was received from the conveyor, but the shutdown command
was cancelled because the device cannot shut down (sample preparation in
progress, etc.).

Action Follow the instructions in the action message to reset.

Error recovery condition Touch [OK] in the action message.

10-52
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.7 Test operation


Each unit can be operated independently in order to check the operation of the device or reset after an error has
occurred.

Note:
The test operation function can only be used when the device is in the ready state or when an
error has occurred.

10.7.1 Checking the operation of the aspiration unit


The operation of the aspiration unit can be checked. This procedure can also be used to reset the aspiration unit
after an error has occurred. Follow the steps below to check operation.

Caution!
Before operating the aspiration unit independently, remove the blood collection sample tubes
and racks in front of the hand clipper.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Test operation].

3 Touch [Aspiration].

4 Check independent operation.

Check independent operation of the Cap Piercing (CP).


Touch [CP] to open the CP operation screen, and then touch [OK] to
start operation.
[Executing CP operation.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the CP operation screen.

10-53
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Check independent operation of the piercer.


Touch [Piercer] to open the piercer operation screen, and then touch
[OK] to start operation.
[Executing piercer operation.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the piercer operation screen.

Check independent operation of the whole blood aspiration pump.


Touch [WB pump] to open the WB aspiration pump screen, and then
touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing WB pumping.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the WB aspiration pump screen.

Check independent operation of the micro collection sample tube holder.


Touch [MicroTube holder] to open the micro tube holder operation
screen, and then touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing micro-tube holder operation.] appears during operation.
When operation ends, the screen returns to the micro tube holder
operation screen.

10.7.2 Checking independent operation of the smear line


The operation of the smear line can be checked. This procedure can also be used to reset after an error occurs
during operation of the smear line. Follow the steps below to check operation.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Test operation].

10-54
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

3 Touch [Smear].

4 Check independent operation.

Check independent operation of the dispensing unit.


Touch [Dispense unit] to open the dispensing unit operation screen,
and then touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing dispensing test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the dispensing unit operation
screen.

Check independent operation of the slide conveyor.


Touch [Slide conveyor] to display the slide conveyor operation screen,
insert at least one slide glass into Cassette No. 5, place at least one
single cassette in the single cassette supply table, and touch [OK] to
start operation.
[Executing slide conveyance.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the slide conveyor screen.

Check independent operation of the smear unit.


Touch [Smear unit] to open the smear unit operation screen, and then
touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing smear unit operation.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the smear unit operation screen.

10-55
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Spreader glass drying can be performed independently.


Touch [Glass dryer] to open the spreader glass drying operation
screen, and then touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing spreader glass dry operation.] appears during operation.
When operation ends, the screen returns to the spreader glass drying
operation screen.

10.7.3 Checking independent operation of the staining line


The operation of the staining line can be checked. This procedure can also be used to reset after an error occurs
during operation of the staining line. Follow the steps below to check operation.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Test operation].

3 Touch [Stain].

4 Check independent operation.

Check independent cassette shifting operation.


Touch [Cassette slide] to open the cassette shift screen, place at least
one cassette on the cassette supply table, and touch [OK] to start
operation.
[Executing cassette shift test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the cassette shift screen.

10-56
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Check independent cassette feed-in operation.


Touch [Cassette feed in] to open the cassette feed in screen, and then
touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing cassette feed in test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the cassette feed in screen.

Check independent cassette feed-out operation.


Touch [Cassette feed out] to open the cassette feed out screen, and
then touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing cassette feed out test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the cassette feed out screen.

Check independent cassette ejection.


Touch [Cassette eject] to open the cassette eject screen, and then
touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing cassette eject test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the cassette eject screen.

Check independent operation of the pipette.


Touch [Pipette] to open the pipette screen, and then touch [OK] to
start operation.
[Executing pipette test.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the pipette screen.

10-57
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Check independent operation of the stopper.


Touch [Stopper] to open the stopper screen, and then touch [OK] to
start operation.
[Executing stopper test.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the stopper screen.

10.7.4 Check independent chamber operation


Operation related to chamber filling and draining can be checked. This procedure can also be used to reset after
an error has occurred during aspiration. Follow the steps below to check operation.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Test operation].

3 Touch [Chamber].

4 Check independent operation.

Check independent methanol aspiration.


Touch [Methanol] to open the methanol filling screen, and then touch
[OK] to start operation.
[Executing Methanol filling.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the methanol filling screen.

10-58
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Check independent CELLPACK DCL aspiration.


Touch [DCL] to open the DCL filling screen, and then touch [OK] to
start operation.
[Executing DCL filling.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the DCL filling screen.

Check independent stain 1 aspiration.


Touch [Stain1] to open the stain 1 filling screen, and then touch [OK]
to start operation.
[Executing stain1 filling.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the stain 1 filling screen.

Check independent stain 2 aspiration.


Touch [Stain2] to open the stain 2 filling screen, and then touch [OK]
to start operation.
[Executing stain2 filling.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the stain 2 filling screen.

Check independent rinse water aspiration.


Touch [Rinse water] to open the rinse water filling screen, and then
touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing rinse water filling.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the rinse water filling screen.

10-59
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Check independent buffer aspiration.


Touch [Buffer] to open the buffer filling screen, and then touch [OK] to
start operation.
[Executing Buffer filling.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the buffer filling screen.

Check independent waste draining.


Touch [Waste draining] to open the waste draining screen, and then
touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing waste draining.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the waste draining screen.

10.7.5 Checking independent sampler operation


Independent operation of the sampler can be checked. This procedure can also be used to reset after an error
has occurred during sampler operation. Follow the steps below to check operation.

Note:
Independent operation of the sampler can only be checked when a sampler (optional) is used.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Test operation].

3 Touch [Sampler].

4 Check independent operation.

10-60
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Check independent feed-in operation of the sampler.


Touch [Rack feed in] to display the rack feed in operation screen.
Place a rack on the sampler and touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing rack feed in test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the rack feed in operation
screen.

Check independent shifting operation of the sampler.


Touch [Rack shift] to display the rack shift screen.
Place a rack on the sampler and touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing rack shift test.] appears during operation. When operation
ends, the screen returns to the rack shift screen.

Check independent feed-out operation of the sampler.


Touch [Rack feed out] to display the rack feed out operation screen.
Place a rack on the sampler and touch [OK] to start operation.
[Executing rack feed-out test.] appears during operation. When
operation ends, the screen returns to the rack feed out operation
screen.

Check independent ID reading operation.


Touch [ID read] to display the ID reading operation screen.
Place a rack loaded with sample tubes with tube ID labels on the
sampler, and touch [OK] to start operation.
When ID reading operation ends, the ID reading results appear.

If a rack operation error occurs during ID reading, an error dialog will


appear and the ID reading operation will be interrupted.
Place the rack again, and then touch [OK] in the error dialog to close
it.

10-61
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.8 Emergency stop


To stop the device in an emergency, press the main power switch on the left side of the front of the device.

Note:
For the details on the main power switch, see Chapter 3.
(➤P.3-1 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Main unit")

10-62
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

Chapter 11 Technical Information

11.1 Performance/specifications

Operating environment Ambient temperature: 15 - 30°C (23°C recommended)


Relative humidity: 20 - 85%

Storage Condition Ambient temperature: -10 to 60°C


(Transportation) Relative humidity: 20 to 95% (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 70 to 106 kPa

Main unit dimensions Width: 855 mm


Height: 655 mm
Depth: 855 mm

Main unit weight Approx. 110 kg

Pneumatic unit Width: 280 mm


dimensions Height: 400 mm
Depth: 355 mm

Pneumatic unit weight Approx. 17 kg

Power supply Main unit: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)


Pneumatic unit: 100 - 117 V AC (50/60 Hz)
220 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Power consumption Main unit / sampler: 650 VA


Pneumatic unit: AC 100 - 117 V 280 VA
AC 220 - 240 V 250 VA

Throughput Max. 120 samples per hour


* (Depends on time required for preceding process and the order rate.)

Sample volume aspirated Sampler mode: 200 µL


Manual mode (closed tube): 200 µL
Manual mode (micro collection sample tube): 60 µL

Sample volume required Sampler mode: 0.6 - 5 mL (12 mm diameter sample tube)
0.8 - 7 mL (15 mm diameter sample tube)
360 - 500 µL (Raised Bottom Tube (RBT))
Manual mode
(closed tube): 0.6 - 5 mL (12 mm diameter sample tube)
0.8 - 7 mL (15 mm diameter sample tube)
360 - 500 µL (Raised Bottom Tube (RBT))
Manual mode
(micro collection sample tube): 300 µL (specified sample tubes)

11-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

Number of stored 1,000 samples


samples

Staining methods Wright single stain


May-Giemsa stain
Wright Giemsa stain

Caution!
• If the humidity is high, slides may not dry well and smear quality may be affected.
• The blood volumes (in sampler mode) in the table indicate the volumes required when the
XN-3000 or XN-9000 is connected and a Raised Bottom Tube is used.
Note that Raised Bottom Tubes cannot be used in standalone sampler analysis of the SP-10
(when an optional sampler is connected).

11.2 Interface protocol


Data output can be performed in a variety of formats via the serial interface or network interface. For details, consult
your local Sysmex representative.

11.3 Checking the program version


To check what version of the program you are running, follow the steps below to display the version information
screen.

1 Touch [Maint.] in the menu screen.


The main maintenance screen appears.

2 Touch [Version info].


The version information screen appears.
The number indicated in [Main Unit] in the version information screen is the program version.

11-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

11.4 GNU General Public License


Device software

Part of the software used with this product is subject to the GNU General Public License.
If you wish to obtain the source code for or detailed information concerning the part of the software that is subject to
the GNU General Public License, contact your local Sysmex representative.
For the part of the software used with this product that is not subject to the GNU General Public License, the source
code may not be obtained, reverse engineered, decompiled, or disassembled.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE


Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.


59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.

Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of
the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some
other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.)
You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if
you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there
is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.

11-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE


TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program",
below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only
if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along
with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and
the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and
telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

11-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy
of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited
by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any
work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and
conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these
terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the
rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

11-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of
this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those
who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program
does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

11-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS


How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) 19yy <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write
to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY
NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c';
they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes
passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your
program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications
with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library GeneralPublic License instead of this
License.

11-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 11 Technical Information

11-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

Chapter 12 Installation

This chapter explains an unpacking checklist and explains how to install the device.

12.1 Unpacking checklist


SP-10 unit (complete unit)

Part Number Name Quantity

AS801779 SP-10 Main Complete 1

AU803829 Product Inspection Certificate (English) 1

BU614652 SP-10 IFU (EN) 1

033-2051-6 Cassette No. 5 Assembly 2

943-2272-3 Air Drier No. 3 Assembly (for XE-21H) 1

923-8092-8 Power Cord No. 15 (C-2)*1 1*2

265-7153-5 Power Cord TA-6P(A)+TA-5(A) H05VV-F*1 1*3,4

AR966071 Wiring Cord_Assy No. 6696 1

BW702115 Bottle_Assy No. 15 1*4

CG975255 Bottle_Assembly No. 16 1*3

953-1095-0 Bottle Assembly No. 2 (SP-10 Rinse) 1*2,4

953-1094-6 Bottle Assembly No. 2 (SP-10 Buffer) 1*2,4

12-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

Part Number Name Quantity

953-6292-8 Lid No. 50 Assembly 2*3,4

AK369883 Intake Tube_Assy No. 12 1

053-2161-0 Float Switch_Assy No. 28 2*3

421-8028-6 Glass Plate No. 4 5

AE680156 Cassette No. 118 120

CN767097 Ink Ribbon IR-STSP01 2

424-3709-7 Bottle Stand No. 2-1 1*3,4

CW342599 Adapter No. 176 1

BA417683 Adapter No. 177 1

266-7767-7 Fuse 50T080H 2

266-7113-3 Cable Tie SSM2S-C 2

369-5188-1 Indication Mark No. 1152 1

AB885963 Mark No. 208 1

12-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

Part Number Name Quantity

442-3431-0 T-Joint No. 21 1

Tube Pharmed
442-6483-4 1
1/32 in x 5/32 in 500 mm

Tube Teflon
442-5409-4 1
0.75 mmID x 1.5 mmOD 100 mm

Tube Teflon
442-5435-1 1
2.5 mmID x 3.5 mmOD 2 m

Tube Teflon
442-5420-6 1
2.0 mmID x 3.0 mmOD 2 m

Tube Teflon
442-5416-1 1
1.2 mmID x 2.0 mmOD 2 m

Tube Polyurethane
442-5338-7 1
4 mmID x 6 mmOD 10 m

Tube Pharmed
442-6486-5 1
1/8 in x 1/4 in 500 mm

Tube Silicone
CA358738 1
2 x 5 #9E55 500 mm

Tube Silicone
BK603598 1
3 x 6.5 #9E55 1 m

Tube Polyurethane
442-5055-4 1
1.8 mm x 3.4 mm 500 mm

Tube Teflon
442-5430-3 1
3.2 mmID x 4.2 mmOD 10 m

Tube Polyurethane
442-5340-5 1
6 mmID x 9 mmOD 17 m

Tube Polyurethane
44253436 1
14 x 10 3 m

BW964100 JUNRON UPI tube 6 mm x 4 mm 3 m 1

348-4108-1 Screw Sems M4 x 8 (A) 2

12-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

Part Number Name Quantity

AA985808 Shutter No. 169 1

442-1657-0 Pipe No. 27 1

CY855270 Intake Tube_Assy No. 67 3*2

BA630978 Intake Tube_Assy No. 68 1*2

*1 Not attached in certain countries and regions.


*2 for North America
*3 for Europe
*4 for Asia-Pacific

Pneumatic unit (PU-17 assembly)


Quantity
Part Number Name
100 - 117 V 220 - 240 V

013-3005-7 PU-17 Complete Assembly (100 - 117 V) 1 -

013-3006-1 PU-17 Complete Assembly (220 - 240 V) - 1

923-8092-8 Cord Set No. 15 1 -

265-7153-5 Power Cord TA-6P(A)+TA-5(A) H05VV-F* - 1

266-5011-3 Fuse STA-4A-N1 (250V4A, Time Lag) 2 -

AY579418 Fuse 02183.15MXP (250V3.15A) - 2

* Not attached in certain countries and regions.

12-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

SP-10 BETA system modification kit


Part Number Name Quantity

013-3055-3 OPSU-10 Main Unit Complete Assembly (for SP-10) 1

073-2764-4 Sample Rack ASSY (XT/PM) 1

033-2072-4 SPi BR Shift Mechanism 1

322-4531-4 SPi Front Cover C 1

322-4532-8 SPi Front Cover D 1

322-4533-1 SPi Front Cover E 1

321-3087-4 Connecting Rod No. 28 2

366-0705-4 Adjustment Board No. 5 2

368-4657-1 Sponge No. 137 2

923-8101-4 Hand Clipper S#4 Assembly 1

923-8108-0 Hand Clipper S#4 Assembly 1

BF689847 Wiring Cord_Assy No. 6719 1

CQ279723 Cover No. 2051 1

368-0036-6 Rubber Shoe C-30-RK38 4

12-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

Part Number Name Quantity

369-8326-1 Caution Mark No. 208 1

348-3812-1 Screw Binding M3 x 6 (SUS) 7

348-3927-1 Screw Binding M4 x 8 (SUS) 14

348-3929-9 Screw Binding M4 x 12 (SUS) 2

348-4101-5 Screw Sems M3 x 8 2

Note:
Packing may vary by country and slight variation from unpacking checklist. Contact your Sysmex
representative for your specific list.

12.2 Before installation


The SP-10 and related equipment is installed by your local Sysmex representative. In the event that relocation
becomes necessary after installation, contact your local Sysmex representative.
Problems resulting from relocation of the device by anyone other than a Sysmex representative are not covered by
the warranty even if within the warranty period.

12.3 Installation

Caution!
• Install in a location where water will not splash on the device.
• Install in a dry, dust-free location that is not exposed to direct sunlight and is not subject to
large temperature variations.
• Do not subject the device to shock or vibration.
• Install in a location with good ventilation.
• Do not install in a location where there is signal noise caused by radios, centrifuges, or other
equipment.
• Do not install in a location where chemicals are stored or gases are present.
• Do not use near electro-conductive or flammable gases, including oxygen, hydrogen and
anesthetics.
• This device is designed for indoor use.
• Plug the power cable into an outlet that you can reach with your hand.

12-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.3.1 Installation space


Allow a clearance of at least 50 cm between the wall and the sides, back, and top panel of the device to enable
maintenance and heat dissipation.

Component Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)

Main Unit 855 855 655 Approx. 110

Sampler 510 220 110 (255*) Approx. 7

Pneumatic unit 280 355 400 Approx. 17

* Height including the tube detection sensor.

855
855

655

355 280

510 110
220

400

12.4 Grounding
The device's power cord has a 3-prong plug. If the power outlet is grounded, the power plug can simply be inserted
into the power outlet to ground the device. If the power outlet is not grounded, use an adapter plug and ground the
ground wire.

Warning!
• Be sure to ground the device.
Insufficient grounding may cause electrical shock.
• Do not exceed the capacity of the power outlet.
Risk of fire.

12-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.5 Installation environment


• Use the device within an ambient temperature range of 15 to 30°C.
• The relative humidity should be from 20 to 85%.
• If the ambient temperature or humidity is not suitable, control with air conditioning.
• Avoid locations with extremely high or low temperatures.
• Avoid locations that are exposed to direct sunlight.
• Select a well-ventilated location.
• Avoid locations near centrifuges, wireless communication equipment, or other communication facilities where high
frequency waves are generated that may cause radio interference.

12-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.6 Removing the shipping fixtures


Remove the following shipping fixtures:
• Shipping Absorber Nos. 8 and 9 Binder clip
• Stopper No. 532
• Protector No. 113
• Binder clip attached to timing belt for slide glass
supply unit (1 place)
• Binder clip attached to timing belt for micro
collection sample tube holder (1 place)
• Protector No. 114 (4 places)
• Protector No. 115 Protector
• CV-250N tie wrap attached to ASP_Assy No. 22 No. 114
(1 place)

Protector
No. 115 Shipping Absorber Shipping Absorber
No. 9 No. 8
Convex
CV-250N

Stopper No. 532

Protector No. 113

12-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.7 Connecting the pneumatic and reagent tubes

12.7.1 Connecting stain 1 and stain 2


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect No. 47 lids to the stain 1 and stain 2 inlet nipples on the rear panel of
the device.

2 Connect No. 47 lids to the stain 1 and stain 2 reagent containers.

3 Attach cable ties and indication marks No. 1152.

12.7.2 Connecting the methanol


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the intake tube nipple of bottle_Assy No. 15 to the methanol inlet
nipple on the rear panel of the unit.

2 Insert the intake tube into bottle_Assy No. 15, and tightly cap.

12.7.3 Connecting CELLPACK DCL


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the DCL inlet nipple on the rear panel of the unit to the nipple on
intake tube_Assy No. 12.

12-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

2 Insert the intake tube_Assy No. 12 into the CELLPACK DCL, and tightly cap.

Cap No. 47
Indication Mark No. 1152

Cable tie

Stain 2 Stain 1 CELLPACK DCL Bottle_Assy


No. 15

12.7.4 Connecting the buffer and rinse water

When phosphate buffer is used for rinsing after staining with stain 1 dilution
Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the buffer / rinse water inlet nipple and the buffer inlet nipple on
the back panel of the device to T-Joint No. 21 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.

2 Connect T-Joint No. 21 to the nipple on float switch_Assy No. 28 with


6 mm x 4 mm tubing inserted through the 20 L container cap with hole.

3 Insert float switch_Assy No. 28 into the phosphate buffer bottle and tightly
cap.

12-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

4 Connect the rinse water inlet nipple on the rear panel of the device to
bottle assembly No. 2 (SP-10 Rinse).

T-Joint No. 21
Float switch_Assy
No. 28

Bottle assembly Phosphate buffer


No. 2 bottle
(SP-10 Rinse)

When rinse water is used for rinsing after staining with stain 1 dilution
Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the buffer / rinse water inlet nipple and the rinse water inlet nipple on
the back panel of the device to T-Joint No. 21 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.

2 Connect T-Joint No. 21 to bottle assembly No. 2 (SP-10 Rinse).

3 Connect the buffer inlet nipple on the back of the device to float
switch_Assy No. 28 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing inserted through the 20 L
container cap with hole.

12-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

4 Insert float switch_Assy No. 28 into the phosphate buffer bottle and tightly
cap.

Float switch_Assy
No. 28
T-Joint
No. 21

Phosphate Bottle assembly No. 2


buffer bottle (SP-10 Rinse)

12.7.5 Connecting the drain lines


Connect 9 mm x 6 mm tubes to stain 1 outlet nipples 1 and 2, the stain 2 outlet nipple, waste outlet nipples 2 and
3, and the overflow nipple on the back panel of the device. Connect the other ends of the tubes to the laboratory
waste tank. Connect one end of the 14 x 10 tube to waste outlet nipple 1, and the other end to the waste tank.
If a laboratory waste tank is not available, connect to the waste container.
Cut the 9 mm x 6 mm tubing to appropriate lengths for the connections.

Waste container

12-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.7.6 Connecting the air tubes


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Install air drier No. 3 on the rear panel of the main unit using the provided
screws.

2 Connect the drain nipple of air drier No. 3 to the air filter drain nipple on the
rear panel of the main unit with 3.4 mm x 1.8 mm tubing.

3 Connect the pressure output nipple on the rear of the pneumatic unit to the
pressure inlet joint of air dryer No. 3 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.

4 Connect the pressure inlet joint on the rear of the device to the outlet joint of
air dryer No. 3 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.

5 Connect the vacuum inlet joint on the rear panel of the device to the vacuum
output nipple on the rear of the pneumatic unit with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.
SP-10 main unit

Pneumatic unit

12-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.8 Connecting the connection cords and power cords

12.8.1 Connecting the connection cords


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the pneumatic unit control cord of the pneumatic unit to the
pneumatic unit control connector on the rear panel of the device.

2 Connect bottle_Assy No. 15, bottle assembly No. 2, and float switch_Assy
No. 28 to the float switch connector on the rear panel of the device using
wiring cord_Assy No. 6696.

3 Connect the wiring cord_Assy No. 6719 to the conveyor connector.

4 Bind the tubes and the connection cords using the tie wraps.

12-15
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 12 Installation

12.8.2 Connecting the power cords


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the main unit to the AC outlet with the power cord.

2 Connect the pneumatic unit to the AC outlet with the power cord.
SP-10 main unit

Wiring cord_Assy No. 6696


Pneumatic unit

Phosphate Bottle assembly


buffer bottle No. 2 Connect to power outlet
(SP-10 Rinse)
Connect to power outlet

Caution!
Use the power cord that comes with the instrument. Also, do not use it with any other instrument.

Note:
The connection cord PA connector is not used.

12.9 Turn power ON


The first time the device started, the service sequence must be run.
This task is performed by your local Sysmex representative.

12.10 Obtaining an IP address


To send data to a host computer over a network, obtain and set an IP address for the device.

12-16
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Chapter 13 Appendix

13.1 ID barcode specifications


Barcode labels can be affixed to sample tubes to enable automatic reading of sample ID numbers.
To use barcode labels, the labels must be compatible with the SP-10 ID barcode reader.
This section explains the barcode label specifications.

Usable barcodes
Compatible barcode types and check digit support are shown below.

Warning!
When using barcodes, use a check digit whenever possible.
If a check digit is not used, the potential for incorrect reading of a barcode increases.

Sample ID number

Barcode type Check digit Number of digits

ITF None Max. 14 digits (sample ID)

Modulus 10 Max. 14 digits (sample ID.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 15 digits


max.

NW-7(*) None Max. 15 digits (sample ID)

Modulus 11 Max. 15 digits (sample ID.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 16 digits


max.

Weighted Modulus 11 Max. 15 digits (sample ID.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 16 digits
max.

Modulus 16 Max. 15 digits (sample ID.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 16 digits


max.

CODE 39 None Max. 15 digits (sample ID)

Modulus 43 Max. 15 digits (sample ID.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 16 digits


max.

JAN-13 Modulus 10 12 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = 13 digits

JAN-8 Modulus 10 7 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = 8 digits

CODE 128 Modulus 103 Max. 15 digits (sample ID.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 16 digits
max.

13-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Information
• Do not use a rack ID barcode for a sample ID.
• When using CODE 128, do not use the function characters.

Note:
* For the start/stop code, use one of the characters "A," "B," "C," "a," "b," or "c."

Rack ID

Barcode type Check digit Number of digits

NW-7 Modulus 16 6 digits (rack no.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 7 digits

CODE39 Modulus 43 6 digits (rack no.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 7 digits

Information
For the start/stop code, use either "D" or "d."

Dimensions of barcode elements


Narrow element ≥ 190 µm
Wide element ≤ 1.2 mm
Narrow element ≤ Gap between characters ≤ Wide element

Narrow/Wide ratio
In each character, the narrow/wide ratios must be as follows:
Narrow (MAX) : Wide (MIN) = 1 : 2.2 or more
Narrow (MIN) : Narrow (MAX) = 1 : 1.3 or less
Wide (MIN) : Wide (MAX) = 1 : 1.4 or less

PCS (Print Contrast Signal) value

Reflectivity of white - Reflectivity of black


PCS=
Reflectivity of white

The measurement method conforms to JIS (Japanese Industrial Standards) X0501, "5.3 Optical Characteristic of Bar
Code Symbols."
Standard: PCS ≥ 0.45

13-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Print quality of barcode label


Use barcode labels of Label Grade C or higher of the ANSI standards.
Reading of laminated labels may not be possible.

Irregularity and roughness of printing


When a bar is magnified, it appears as shown on the right.
MAX
Expressing the variation in the width of a bar as
MIN
MAX - MIN
S= x 100%
MAX
Bar
S must be ≤ 20%.

Dimensions of barcode label


Margins: 2.5 mm or more (5 mm or more on both sides
is normally recommended.)
Effective length of barcode: 48 mm or less (40 mm or less is Bar height
recommended.)
Bar height: 20 mm or more (6 mm or more for a rack
label)

Margin Effective length Margin


of barcode
Check digit
To improve the reliability of ID reading, it is recommended that a check digit be added.
Taking the sample ID "258416" as an example, the procedures for calculating a check digit for modulus 11 and
weighted modulus 11 are explained below.

Modulus 11
Follow the steps below to calculate.

1 Weight each digit.


The weighting of each digit is shown below.

Digit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Weighting 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

2 Add up the results of the weightings (multiplications), and let this be S.


S = 14 + 30 + 40 + 16 + 3 + 12 = 115

13-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

3 Calculate the remainder when S is divided by 11, and calculate the


complement of the remainder.
The complement will be the check digit.
115 / 11 = 10, with a remainder of 5
11 - 5 = 6
The check digit will be 6.
Note that all English symbols except the numerals 0 to 9 are regarded as 0 when making the calculation.
When the division of S by 11 results in a remainder of 0, or when calculation of the check digit results in 10,
zero is used as the check digit.

Weighted Modulus 11
Weighted modulus 11 has two sets of weightings. The check digit is first calculated using the first set of
weightings. If the check digit is 10, the check digit is calculated again using the second set of weightings. The
result will always be a value from 0 to 9. Except for difference in weightings, the calculation method is the same
as for Modulus 11.
Follow the steps below to calculate.

1 Weight each digit.


The weighting of each digit is shown below.

Weighting: W12 W11 W10 W9 W8 W7 W6 W5 W4 W3 W2 W1

1st set: 6 3 5 9 10 7 8 4 5 3 6 2

2nd set: 5 8 6 2 10 4 3 7 6 8 5 9

2 5 8 4 1 6

x x x x x x

Weighting 8 4 5 3 6 2

16 20 40 12 6 12

2 Add up the results of the weightings (multiplications), and let this be S.


S = 16 + 20 + 40 + 12 + 6 + 12 = 106

3 Calculate the remainder when S is divided by 11, and calculate the


complement of the remainder.
The complement will be the check digit.
106 / 11= 9, with a remainder of 7
11 - 7 = 4, thus the check digit is 4.

13-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Note that all English symbols except the numerals 0 to 9 are regarded as 0 when making the calculation.
When the division of S by 11 results in a remainder of 0, or when calculation of the check digit results in 0,
zero is used as the check digit.

Note:
For weighted Modulus 11, the weightings for the 13th, 14th and 15th digits are 0.

13.2 Print format of the printer


The information that can be printed by the printer can be changed as shown below based on the combination of font
size and format.

Note:
To print at 12 x 24 (dots per character) or 12 x 24 LNG (dots per character), an device setting
must be changed. To have the settings changed, contact your local Sysmex representative.

Print format content

Font size setting Print type setting Print content

16 x 32 Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)
Type 2 Text (max. 15 characters) x 1 line
1-dimensional barcode (max. 8 characters)

Type 3 Text (max. 8 characters) x 3 line


2-dimensional barcode (max. 50 characters)

12 x 24 Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)
Type 2 Text (max. 15 characters) x 1 line
1-dimensional barcode (max. 8 characters)

Type 3 Text (max. 8 characters) x 3 line


2-dimensional barcode (max. 50 characters)

12 x 24 LNG Type 1 Text (max. 15 characters) x 3 line


(dots per character)
Type 2 Text (max. 15 characters) x 2 line
1-dimensional barcode (max. 8 characters)

Type 3 Text (max. 13 characters) x 2 line


Text (max. 15 characters) x 1 line
2-dimensional barcode (max. 20 characters)

13-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Print position (16 x 32 dots per character, 12 x 24 dots per character)

Type 1 (text 3 lines)

Frosted part
Text - 1 (15)

Text - 2 (15)

Text - 3 (15)

Type 2 (one-dimensional barcode + text 1 lines)

Text (15)

Slide Barcode (one-dimensional)

Type 3 (two-dimensional barcode + text 3 lines)

Barcode Text - 1 (8)


(two- Text - 2 (8)
dimensional)
Text - 3 (8)

13-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Print position (12 x 24 LNG dots per character)

Type 1 (text 3 lines)

Frosted part
Text - 1 (15)

Text - 2 (15)

Text - 3 (15)

Type 2 (one-dimensional barcode + text 2 lines)

Text - 1 (15)

Text - 2 (15)
Slide

Barcode (one-dimensional)

Type 3 (two-dimensional barcode + text 3 lines)

Barcode Text - 1 (13)


(two-
dimensional) Text - 2 (13)

Text - 3 (15)

13-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

13.3 Recovery process for stain tank errors


The error recovery process for the error messages below that occur in the stain tank can be changed in the settings.

Staining process
Error message Samples that have Samples that have not
passed the error location passed the error location

No cassette at stain pipette1


No cassette at stain pipette2
No cassette at stain pipette3
No cassette at rinse pipette
No cassette at eject pos.
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette1
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette2
Wait until the error is
Cassette feed out err at stain pipette3
cleared and then resume
Cassette feed out error at cassette dry pos.
automatically
Methanol pipette move err (UP) Auto continue
Setting 1: Resume staining
Methanol pipette move err (DOWN)
process
Stain pipette1 move err (UP)
Setting 2: Disposal process
Stain pipette1 move err (DOWN)
Stain pipette2 move err (UP)
Stain pipette2 move err (DOWN)
Stain pipette3 move err (UP)
Stain pipette3 move err (DOWN)
Water pipette move err (UP)
Water pipette move err (DOWN)

Note:
To change error recovery settings, setting changes are necessary. To have the settings
changed, contact your local Sysmex representative.

Setting 1: Resume staining process


For a sample for which the staining process stops due to an error, resume the staining process after the error is
cleared. That sample will be marked by [*] in the Smear List screen.

Note:
For the sample for which the staining process is resumed, the staining time is extended by the
amount of time the staining process was stopped. When using the sample, check to make sure
there are no problems with the staining condition before performing analysis.

13-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Setting 2: Disposal process


For a sample for which the staining process stops due to an error, do not resume the staining process after the error
is cleared. That sample will be marked by [ ] in the Smear List screen.

[DisAll] will appear in certain action messages. If this is touched, the current operation will stop and the cassette will
be ejected with all samples in the cassette regarded as error samples.
However, you can have operation take place normally for cassettes on the line after the location where the error
occurred.
To do so, execute [DisAll] after the error cassette has been ejected onto the cassette feed-out table.

Note:
For action messages, refer to Chapter 10.
(➤P.10-2 "Chapter 10: 10.3 Action messages")

13.4 Sample IDs with 16 or more digits


The maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in sample IDs can be changed from 15 to 22 digits.
To change the setting, contact your local Sysmex representative.

13.4.1 Sample registration

Register Slide screen


If the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in
sample IDs has been changed to 22 digits, [<] will appear at the left
side of the first page of the Register Slide screen, and the lower 14
digits of each sample ID will be displayed. Touch [←] to display the
22-digit sample IDs.

13-9
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Registering a new sample


If the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in
sample IDs has been changed to 22 digits, the input method in
Sample ID of the New Register screen changes. To enter a sample
ID, touch [Mnl Inpt]. The manual input screen will appear. Touch the
[15 digits] box. The alphanumeric keypad appears. Up to 15
alphanumeric characters can be entered, including hyphens. Enter
the digits of the sample ID in order from the left. If there are more
than 15 digits, touch the [7 digits] box. The alphanumeric keypad
appears. Enter the remaining 7 digits. When you have finished, touch
[Return]. The manual input screen closes and the entered sample ID
appears in [Sample ID] of the [New Register] screen.
If entering from the hand-held barcode reader, enter without opening
the manual input screen.

13.4.2 Preparing smears

Sampler screen
If the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in
sample IDs has been changed to 22 digits, the sample ID input
method changes. For details on the input method, see the following:
(➤P.13-10 "Registering a new sample")

13-10
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Manual screen
If the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in
sample IDs has been changed to 22 digits, the sample ID input
method changes. For details on the input method, see the following:
(➤P.13-10 "Registering a new sample")

Smear list screen


If the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in
sample IDs has been changed to 22 digits, [<] will appear at the left
side of the first page of the Smear list screen, and the lower 14 digits
of each sample ID will be displayed. Touch [←] to display the 22-digit
sample IDs. On the 2nd to the 6th pages, the lower 15 digits of each
sample ID appear.

Sample search screen


If the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in
sample IDs has been changed to 22 digits, the input method for the
search information changes. For details on the input method, see
below. Although up to 22 digits can be entered for the sample ID,
only 15 digits can be entered for printing.
(➤P.13-10 "Registering a new sample")

13-11
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Printing sample IDs on glass slides


When printing a sample ID on a glass slide, the digits that can be printed will be printed from the right side in the
text or barcode.

Note:
All digits of the following two types of 22 digit sample IDs can be printed:
• 2-D barcodes (maximum 50 half-width digits) with the font size set to 16 x 32 (dots/character)
and the print type set to Type 3
• 2-D barcodes (maximum 50 half-width digits) with the font size set to 12 x 24 (dots/character)
and the print type set to Type 3

ID barcode specifications
Barcode types and corresponding check digits that can be used when the maximum number of digits that can be
entered and displayed in sample IDs has been changed to 22 are as follows.

Barcode type Check digit Number of digits

ITF None Max. 22 digits (sample ID)

Modulus 10 Max. 22 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits

NW-7(*) None Max. 22 digits (sample ID)

Modulus 11 Max. 22 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits

Weighted Modulus 11 Max. 22 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits

Modulus 16 Max. 22 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits

CODE 39 None Max. 22 digits (sample ID)

Modulus 43 Max. 22 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits

JAN-13 Modulus 10 12 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = 13 digits

JAN-8 Modulus 10 7 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = 8 digits

CODE 128 Modulus 103 Max. 22 digits (sample ID) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits

Information
• Do not use a rack ID barcode for a sample ID barcode.
• When using CODE 128, do not use the function characters.

Note:
Any one of the characters "A", "B," "C," "a," "b," or "c" can be used for the Start/Stop code.

13-12
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

Check digits

Modulus 11
When the maximum number of digits that can be entered and displayed in sample IDs has been changed to 22,
the digits and weightings of Modulus 11 change as follows:

Digit 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Weighting 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Weighted Modulus 11
When the maximum number of digits that can be displayed and entered in sample IDs has been changed to 22
digits, the weightings of digit 13 and higher are 0. These are not included in the check digit calculation.

13-13
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 13 Appendix

13-14
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

14.1 Introduction
The DIA (DI-60) is an automated hemogram analyzer that creates hemograms of stained smears of human
peripheral blood and categorizes the hemograms. A stained smear prepared on the SP-10 is sent to the DIA (DI-60)
via the link unit, making it possible to build a system that automates the process from preparation of smears to
categorization of blood cells.

When the DIA (DI-60) is connected, the storage location of a slide can be entered from the SP-10 screen, allowing
you to specify whether the slide is to be sent to the DIA (DI-60) or stored in the SP-10.
The screens that appear and functions that can be set when the DIA (DI-60) is connected are explained below.

14.2 Slide registration


When the DIA (DI-60) is connected, the storage location of a slide can be set in the [Register Slide] screen of the SP-10.
This section only explains the slide storage location.

14.2.1 Register Slide screen


The [Register Slide] screen shows a list of registered information.
When the DIA (DI-60) is connected to the SP-10, [DIR] (storage
location information) also appears.

[DIR] The storage location of a slide is indicated as described below.


When 2 slides are ordered, the first order and second order are separated by [/].
[SP], [S] Store in the SP-10
[DIA], [D] Send to the DIA (DI-60)
[-] A slide is not prepared

14-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

14.2.2 Registering a new slide


New slide information can be registered. When the DIA (DI-60) is
connected to the SP-10, the storage location of the slide can also be
set.

[Direction] Set the storage location of the slide.


[SP] or [DIA] can be selected.

14.3 Smear preparation


When the DIA (DI-60) is connected to the SP-10, the storage location of the slide can be specified when a smear is
prepared.
In the case of sampler smear preparation, after the smear is automatically prepared on the SP-10, the slide can be
sent to the storage location specified during smear preparation registration.
This section only explains the slide storage location.

14.3.1 Manual smear preparation


In manual smear preparation, samples are aspirated one-by-one in
the whole blood aspiration unit, and the smears are made and
stained.
To make smears manually, it is necessary to set the operation mode,
slide print number, smear level, slide selection, and the number of
slides for each sample.

Settings for manual smear preparation are entered in the manual


mode screen. When the DIA (DI-60) is connected to the SP-10,
the storage location of the slide can also be set.

[Op mode] Set the operation mode and storage location.


[SmSt/SP], [SmSt/DIA], [Stain/SP], [Stain/DIA], [Smear], or [Print] can be
selected ([SmSt] indicates "Smear Stain").

14-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

Information
When the operation mode is set to [Smear], it is not possible to select [SmSt/SP], [SmSt/DIA],
[Stain/SP], or [Stain/DIA] for manual operation.
When the operation mode is set to [SmSt/SP] or [SmSt/DIA], it is not possible to select [Smear]
for manual operation.
See the table below.

Manual operation mode


Operation mode
settings [SmSt/SP] [Stain/SP]
[Smear] [Print]
[SmSt/DIA] [Stain/DIA]

[SmSt/SP]
OK NA OK OK
[SmSt/DIA]

[Smear] NA OK NA OK

OK: Available, NA: Not available

Depending on the selected operation mode, some settings cannot be configured as shown below.

Operation mode [SmSt/SP] [Stain/SP]


[Smear] [Print]
settings [SmSt/DIA] [Stain/DIA]

[Sample ID.] OK OK NA OK

[Tube type] OK OK NA NA

[Level] OK OK NA NA

[Slide] OK OK NA OK

[HC Query] OK OK NA OK

[No of slide] OK OK NA OK

OK: Available, NA: Not available

14-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

14.4 Smear list screen


When the DIA (DI-60) is connected to the SP-10, the storage location can be displayed in the information of a
completed smear and output.
This section only explains the slide storage location.

Smear information appears in the [Smear list] screen. When the DIA
(DI-60) is connected to the SP-10, the storage location of the smear also
appears and is shown in [STATE].

[STATE] The smear preparation state is shown as indicated below.


When smear preparation is completed, the slide storage location appears. In
the other states, the storage location is not shown.
[Done/SP] Smear preparation is done and the slide has been stored in the SP-10.
[Done/DIA] Smear preparation is done and the slide has been sent to the DIA (DI-60)

Information
Even if the slide is to be sent to the DIA (DI-60), it will be stored in the SP-10 in the following
cases:
• Error smear
• An error sample ID was assigned to the smear
If a slide is removed while being sent to the DIA (DI-60), [Done/DIA] will appear even if the slide
did not arrive at the DIA (DI-60) link unit.

14-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

14.5 Instrument settings


When the DIA (DI-60) is connected to the SP-10, the settings menu can be used to set the slide storage location in
the operation mode default settings.
This section explains only the slide storage location.

14.5.1 Operation mode settings screen


The default settings for the operation mode and smear preparation
conditions can be set in the operation mode settings screen.
When the DIA (DI-60) is connected to the SP-10, the storage location
of the slide can also be set.

[Op mode] Set the operation mode and storage location.


[SmSt/SP], [SmSt/DIA], or [Smear] can be selected ([SmSt] indicates "Smear
Stain").

14-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 14 DIA (DI-60) Connection

14-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

Chapter 15 Liu Stain

Staining by the Liu stain method can be performed.


To use the Liu stain method, contact your local Sysmex representative.

For the name of each part, screen displays, messages, and instrument operation procedures, refer to the
chapters of this manual as indicated below.
• Stain1 → Liu A
• Stain2 → Liu B
• Stain1 dil → Liu A+Liu B

15.1 Reagents
Liu A stain (procured locally)
Liu A stain is used for staining blood smears in the automated hematology slide preparation unit.

Storage temperature Indicated in the package insert


Shelf life before opening Indicated in the package insert

Warning!
Liu A stain is classified as a flammable substance. Store it in a safety container in accordance
with your local laws and regulations. Liu A stain contains methanol and is flammable in an
environmental temperature. Handle with utmost care.

Liu B stain (procured locally)


Liu B stain is used for staining blood smears in the automated hematology slide preparation unit.

Storage temperature Indicated in the package insert


Shelf life before opening Indicated in the package insert

Warning!
Liu B stain is classified as a flammable substance. Store it in a safety container in accordance
with your local laws and regulations. Liu B stain contains methanol and is flammable in an
environmental temperature. Handle with utmost care.

15-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

15.2 Making a smear

15.2.1 Startup procedure

Inspection before turning on the power

Checking the reagents


Verify that sufficient reagents will be available for the samples before starting the system. The system will
automatically stop and alert operator if reagent runs out during smear preparation process. Operations will
resume once reagent is added and reagent replacement is performed. For the required volumes of the reagents,
see below.
* The reagent quantities below are effective when the dye conditions are set to the default values.

Reagent volumes used to prepare one smear

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Liu A staining solution Approx. 6.65 mL

Liu B staining solution Approx. 6 mL

Rinse water Approx. 27 mL

When methanol prefix is performed

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 21 mL

Liu A staining solution Approx. 6.65 mL

Liu B staining solution Approx. 6 mL

Rinse water Approx. 27 mL

Methanol Approx. 6 mL

Reagent volumes used at startup


Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Liu A staining solution Approx. 41 mL

Liu B staining solution Approx. 24 mL

Rinse water Approx. 82 mL

15-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Liu A staining solution Approx. 205 mL

Liu B staining solution Approx. 219 mL

Rinse water Approx. 82 mL

When methanol prefix is performed


Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Liu A staining solution Approx. 41 mL

Liu B staining solution Approx. 24 mL

Rinse water Approx. 82 mL

Methanol Approx. 24 mL

Startup after shutdown by [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 48 mL

Liu A staining solution Approx. 205 mL

Liu B staining solution Approx. 219 mL

Rinse water Approx. 82 mL

Methanol Approx. 24 mL

Reagent volumes used in [Shutdown1]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 149 mL

Liu A staining solution Not used

Liu B staining solution Not used

Rinse water Approx. 110 mL

CELLCLEAN Approx. 4 mL

Methanol Approx. 126 mL

15-3
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

Reagent volumes used in [Shutdown2]

Reagent name Reagent volume

CELLPACK DCL Approx. 149 mL

Liu A staining solution Not used

Liu B staining solution Not used

Rinse water Approx. 75 mL

CELLCLEAN Approx. 4 mL

Methanol Approx. 632 mL

15.3 Weekly maintenance

15.3.1 Cleaning the staining line


If [Shutdown2] is not performed, follow the steps below to clean the staining line once a week.
When staining line cleaning is performed, the hydraulic system through which the staining solutions run is
automatically cleaned and the staining solutions are replaced.

Reagent volumes used to clean the staining line


Single staining
Reagent name Reagent volume

Liu A solution Approx. 205 mL

Liu B solution Approx. 219 mL

Rinse water Approx. 157 mL

Methanol Approx. 632 mL

When methanol prefix is performed


Single staining
Reagent name Reagent volume

Liu A solution Approx. 205 mL

Liu B solution Approx. 219 mL

Rinse water Approx. 157 mL

Methanol Approx. 656 mL

15-4
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

15.4 Connecting the pneumatic and reagent tubes

15.4.1 Connecting Liu A and Liu B


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect No. 47 lids to the Liu A and Liu B inlet nipples on the rear panel of the
device.

2 Connect No. 47 lids to the Liu A and Liu B reagent containers.

3 Fix the cable tie on each of the No. 47 lids and affix the label “S1” and “S2” to
identify the Liu A solution and the Liu B solution respectively.

15.4.2 Connecting the methanol


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the intake tube nipple of bottle_Assy No. 15 to the methanol inlet
nipple on the rear panel of the unit.

2 Insert the intake tube into bottle_Assy No. 15, and tightly cap.

15.4.3 Connecting CELLPACK DCL


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Connect the DCL inlet nipple on the rear panel of the unit to the nipple on
intake tube_Assy No. 12.

15-5
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

2 Insert the intake tube_Assy No. 12 into the CELLPACK DCL, and tightly cap.

Cap No. 47
Indication Mark No. 1152

Cable tie

Liu B Liu A CELLPACK DCL Bottle_Assy


solution solution No. 15

15.4.4 Connecting the rinse water

1 Connect the rinse water inlet nipple on the rear panel of the device to
bottle assembly No. 2 (SP-10 Rinse).

Bottle assembly
No. 2
(SP-10 Rinse)

15-6
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

15.4.5 Connecting the drain lines


Connect 9 mm x 6 mm tubes to stain 1 outlet nipples 1 and 2, the stain 2 outlet nipple, waste outlet nipples 2 and
3, and the overflow nipple on the back panel of the device. Connect the other ends of the tubes to the laboratory
waste tank. Connect one end of the 14 x 10 tube to waste outlet nipple 1, and the other end to the waste tank.
If a laboratory waste tank is not available, connect to the waste container.
Cut the 9 mm x 6 mm tubing to appropriate lengths for the connections.

Waste container

15.4.6 Connecting the air tubes


Follow the steps below to connect.

1 Install air drier No. 3 on the rear panel of the main unit using the provided
screws.

2 Connect the drain nipple of air drier No. 3 to the air filter drain nipple on the
rear panel of the main unit with 3.4 mm x 1.8 mm tubing.

3 Connect the pressure output nipple on the rear of the pneumatic unit to the
pressure inlet joint of air dryer No. 3 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.

4 Connect the pressure inlet joint on the rear of the device to the outlet joint of
air dryer No. 3 with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.

15-7
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 15 Liu Stain

5 Connect the vacuum inlet joint on the rear panel of the device to the vacuum
output nipple on the rear of the pneumatic unit with 6 mm x 4 mm tubing.
SP-10 main unit

Pneumatic unit

15-8
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 16 Warranty

Chapter 16 Warranty

All Sysmex devices are warranted against defective material or workmanship for a period of one year, commencing
on the date of installation at the customer's premises. This warranty does not cover any defects, malfunctions, or
damage due to:

• Accident, neglect or willful mistreatment of the product;


• Failure to use, operate, service, or maintain the product in accordance with the applicable Sysmex Instructions for
Use.
• Failure to use the appropriate reagents and consumables specified for the product.

Information
If the customer relocates the device or operates it at a different location, the warranty is
invalidated. Contact your local Sysmex representative before relocating.

16-1
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Chapter 16 Warranty

16-2
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Index

Index

A Emergency stop .....................................10-62


Action messages......................................10-2 Entering the password ...............................8-1
Adjusting the air pressure ........................9-25 Error dialog ..............................................10-1
Alarm..........................................................8-6 Error history .............................................10-3
As-needed maintenance ..........................9-21 Error list screen........................................10-2
Avoiding infections......................................2-2 Error message list ....................................10-4

B F
Backup .....................................................8-37 Fan settings..............................................8-11
Barcode label affixing...............................6-12
Barcode settings ......................................8-12 G
Before installation.....................................12-6 General information ...................................2-1
Brightness ..................................................8-6 GNU General Public License ...................11-3
Grounding ................................................12-7
C
Cause of errors H
and remedial actions ...........................10-11 Handling of reagents..................................2-3
Chamber independent operation............10-58 History......................................................9-53
Checking the water level in the trap Host communication settings ...................8-34
chamber and discarding the water ..........9-9 Host computer inquiry ................................5-5
Cleaning the single cassettes ..................9-11 HOST connection.....................................2-15
Cleaning the smearing
and staining line ....................................9-21 I
Cleaning the smearing line.......................9-24 ID barcode specifications.........................13-1
Cleaning the staining line .........................9-15 Independent operation
Collecting and preparing samples............6-10 of the aspiration unit............................10-53
Connecting pneumatic Inspection before turning on the power......6-1
and reagent tubes ...............................12-10 Installation environment ...........................12-8
Connecting the connection cords...........12-15 Installation space .....................................12-7
Connecting the power cords...................12-16 Intended use ..............................................1-3
Interface ...................................................8-30
D Interface protocol .....................................11-2
Daily maintenance......................................9-2
Date and time setting .................................8-2 L
Default settings list ...................................8-40 Labels on the device ..................................2-8
Deleting smear information List of menu items....................................3-20
Registration............................................5-6 Liu stain....................................................15-1
Smear list...............................................7-7 Loading slide glasses.................................6-9
Device Maintenance...................................9-1
M
Device Settings ................................ 8-1, 14-5
Main unit ....................................................3-1
Device settings ...........................................8-8 Maintenance ..............................................2-4
DIA (DI-60) connection.............................14-1
Manual smear preparation ............. 6-17, 14-2
Display and sound......................................8-6
Disposal of waste fluid, Menu screen ............................................3-13
waste materials, and the device ..............2-5 Monthly maintenance...............................9-21

E N
Network....................................................8-31
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .........2-1
Numeric keypad dialogs...........................3-14

i
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018
Index

O Serial communication settings................. 8-33


Obtaining an IP address ........................ 12-16 Setting sampler stop conditions............... 8-36
Opening the manual mode screen........... 6-17 Setting the serial number........................... 8-3
Operation mode settings................ 8-23, 14-5 Settings for
Operators ................................................. 2-14 manual smear preparation.................... 6-17
Output ........................................................ 7-6 Shutdown................................................. 6-23
Overview of the instrument ........................ 1-3 Shutdown 1................................................ 9-2
Shutdown 2.............................................. 9-19
P Smear and stain settings ......................... 8-23
Part Names and Functions ........................ 3-1 Smear conditions..................................... 8-25
Password setting........................................ 8-5 Smear line independent operation......... 10-54
Performance/specifications ...................... 11-1 Smear list..........................................7-1, 14-4
Pneumatic unit ........................................... 3-9 Smear preparation............................6-1, 14-2
Power-on........................................ 6-7, 12-16 SP-10 maintenance
Print format of the printer ......................... 13-5 inspection checklist............................... 9-55
Printer settings......................................... 8-15 Spreader glass cleaning ............................ 9-6
Program version....................................... 11-2 Stain conditions ....................................... 8-27
Staining line independent operation ...... 10-56
R Startup procedure...................................... 6-1
Rack......................................................... 6-12 Startup process ......................................... 6-8
Reagent registration ...................... 9-33, 9-34 Status display .......................................... 3-16
Reagent registration function ................... 9-32 Supply parts history................................. 9-53
Reagent registration selection screen...... 9-32 Supply replacement................................. 9-38
Reagent replacement history......... 9-37, 9-54 System settings ......................................... 8-2
Reagents ................................................... 4-1
T
Registering a new sample ............... 5-3, 14-2
Technical information ............................... 11-1
Registering sample information ............... 6-12 Test operation ........................................ 10-53
Removing the shipping fixtures................ 12-9 Timer mode ............................................. 6-23
Replace ink ribbon ................................... 9-49 Timer setting.............................................. 8-8
Replacing a fuse ...................................... 9-45 Touch panel calibration .............................. 8-7
Replacing a reagent..............9-33, 9-34, 9-38 Troubleshooting ....................................... 10-1
Replacing rubber plate No. 39 ................. 9-44
Replacing the hand clippers .................... 9-43 U
Replacing the spreader glass .................. 9-46 Unpacking checklist ................................. 12-1
Replacing the staining solutions Using the sampler to prepare smears ..... 6-10
in the stain chambers............................ 9-13
Replacing the waste container................. 9-30 V
Restore .................................................... 8-38 Volume....................................................... 8-6

S W
Safety Information...................................... 2-1 Warranty .................................................. 16-1
Sample Registration......................... 5-1, 14-1 Weekly maintenance ............................... 9-15
Sample tube setting ................................... 8-4
Sample tubes ........................................... 6-11
Sampler (optional) ................................... 3-10
Sampler independent operation............. 10-60
Screen configuration ................................ 3-11
Search ....................................................... 7-4
Selecting the displayed information ........... 7-3
Sensor settings ........................................ 8-10

ii
SP-10 Instructions for Use Revised October 2018

You might also like